Home

Ford 2010 Fusion Automobile User Manual

1. 349 filling your vehicle with FUEL EA 344 346 351 filter specifications 344 363 fuel pump shut off 291 improving fuel economy 350 octane rating 348 367 UAL CY ta m en ac 348 running out of fuel 307 349 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index safety information relating to automotive fuels 344 FUSOS Aarne 291 292 G Garagedooropener 108 Gas cap see Fuel cap 346 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 350 GAUBE S animal dinde 18 19 H Hazard flashers 290 Head restraints 157 Headlamps e 75 AMINE YE KY 77 78 autolamp system 75 bulb specifications 81 daytime running lights 76 fashtopass 76 highbeam 76 replacing bulbs 82 tumingonandoff 75 Heating heating and air conditioning SYSTEM aiies 60 62 64 66 Hillstartassist 264 Homelink wireless control SVSUGIUD arala sadak il bala 108 HOO sersem asama alam 330 I gile sesimiz elde 243 367 Illuminated visor mirror 89 399 Index Infant seats instrument panel dimming 77 see Safety seats 196 interior lamps 80 82 Inspe
2. ON ldV ssayqqv LNIdd ASV41d SINVN 66 8908r IN 20 ekoy cZ08 xog O d dS P4104 0 SIU pew pue mojaq UO EWJOJU BU 9J9JdL109 aow usea oL idSJ P404 YUM PUIN 40 3983d BUINUAY Jag 375 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Edge edg USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Ford ESP is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company Depending on the plan you purchase Ford ESP provides benefits such as e Rental reimbursement e Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford Motor Company dealership There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford ESP you receive peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of Ford Motor Company dealers For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you NOTE Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford ESP co
3. WARNING Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision REAR SEATS Rear seat head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat outboard head restraints that look differently than the front head restraints but function similarly WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion For details about how to raise lower and remove the rear head restraints refer to Adjustable head restraints at the beginning of this chapter The center rear head restraint is fixed and non adjustable 157 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Folding down the 60 40 rear seats Note The head restraints should be placed in the full down position before folding the seatback down Note Ensure that no objects such as books purses or briefcas
4. 137 replacement additional transmitters 136 replacing the batteries 135 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Remote start 137 Remote start climate OPETAllON sa lasa ada 73 Reverse sensing system 265 Roadside assistance 289 Roofrac 118 S Safety belts see Safety restraints 162 165 167 169 170 Safety Canopy 185 188 Safety defects reporting 320 Safety restraints 162 165 167 169 170 Belt Minder 172 extension assembly 170 foradults 166 167 169 for Children lt ssk si 191 Occupant Classification DONSOM iisisti SEn 163 warning light and CHIME sarsa 171 172 Safety restraints LATCH ANCIOTS iere laa 200 Safety seats for children 196 Safety Compliance Certification Label 368 Satellite Radio Information 54 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Normal Scheduled Maintenance and Log 383 What Maintenance Schedule Should You Follow 379 DEALS sp sedir sada Bia adaya 148 child safety seats 196 CLC ANS asec A ER 326 401 Index easy access easyout CHANGING ae amk 300 303 e AGUINE ER 156 checking the pressure 215 front SEd S sess 151 154 INMATING Ee 2
5. 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash 12 times in three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash 12 times in three seconds AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS 176 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important supplemental restraint system precautions Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Steps you can take to p
6. 79 Steering wheel CONTOS an ze Seki Karali 105 U GHGS ME EA 89 Universal garage door T DEME ezine a asim 108 Tilt steering wheel 89 V Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle Identification Number Tires Wheels and Loading 226 AR 368 aS 211 212 300 Vehicle loading 231 AMSNIMEMG sierra zam 219 Ventilating your vehicle 248 GAL E e a emsale sam d 215 402 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus WwW Warning lights see Lights 12 Washer Tid eee emare asm 332 Water Driving through 288 Windows D NEL erante tenes 92 rear wiper washer 89 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Windshield washer fluid and WIDETS em teresa wh Aaya 87 checking and adding fluid 332 replacing wiper blades 332 333 Wrecker towing 311 403
7. Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set Display Gauge Display Fuel Gauge Fuel gauge Tachometer Trip Display Standard Enhanced English Espanol Fran ais Miles amp Gallons Kilometers amp Liters Fahrenheit F Celsius C Restore defaults Hold OK to Restore Settings to Factory Defaults Information In this mode you can view different vehicle system information and perform a system check When Press OK for info is displayed pressing OK will give you information on the currently selected displayed options Information is only available when traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h MyKey Admin Keys Number of admin keys MyKeys Number of MyKeys programmed MyKey Miles km Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey 39 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Some items will only display during a system check if a problem has been detected If an issue exists on one of the monitored systems the message center will display the number of warnings that need immediate attention in red and the number of informational warnings will be listed in amber Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list press the right arrow button to display specific information on the highlighted warning System warnings and status messages System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In t
8. 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed The surface of the radar is Clean the fascia area in front of the radar dirty or obstructed in some either side or remove obstruction way The surface of the radar is Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes not dirty or obstructed to allow the radar to detect that it is no longer blocked Note The vehicle must be in D Drive and a few vehicles must pass so that the BLIS can clear a blocked state Heavy rainfall or heavy No action required by the driver The snowfall is interfering with system will automatically reset to an the radar signals unblocked state once the rainfall snowfall rate decreases or stops Do not use BLIS and or CTA in heavy rainfall or heavy snowfall Due to the nature of radar technology it is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked This is rare and known as a false blockage warning A false blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a key cycle Trailer tow false alerts When towing a trailer the sensors may detect the trailer thus causing a false alert It may be desirable to turn the BLIS off if the false alerts become annoying Day and night brightness The BLIS and or CTA alert will automatically dim when the headlamp switch is in PARK ON or AUTO ON and night time darkness has been detected by
9. Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean e If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released 361 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Tires Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 m every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Removing vehicle from storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces Check windshield wipers for any deterioration Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice sguirrel nests Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
10. ia iia Note When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is illuminated the passenger side airbag seat mounted may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased 182 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion an
11. 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Increasing speed while using speed control To set a higher speed e Press SET upward and hold until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap up function Press SET upward and release to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press SET upward and release Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce a set speed e Press SET downward and hold until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap down function Press SET downward and release to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press SET downward and release Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control press OFF downward or turn off the ignition Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive cruise control ACC is much like speed control only this system is designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane The driver can select from one of four GAP settings the controls are located on the steering wheel At startup the system
12. 43 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster COULD NOT PROGRAM KEY Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Refer to MyKey M in the Locks and Security chapter for more information KEY PROGRAMMED 3 KEYS TOTAL Displayed during spare key programming when a third Intelligent Access Key is programmed to the system KEY PROGRAMMED 4 KEYS TOTAL Displayed during spare key programming when a fourth Intelligent Access Key is programmed to the system MAX NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been programmed MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when MyKey is active MYKEY NOT CREATED Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed NO KEY DETECTED if equipped Displayed if the Intelligent Access Key is not detected by the system in the following three scenarios e When the start stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through the ignition states e When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed e When the vehicle s speed exceeds 10 mph 16 km h for the first time after starting Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information PRESS BRAKE TO START if equipped Displayed when the start stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied This is a remind
13. Audio control features SEEK Press up or down to select the next previous radio station preset CD track or satellite radio A channel if equipped preset depending on which media mode you are in MEDIA Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes MUTE Press to silence the radio y VOL Volume Press up or down to increase or decrease the volume 105 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls NavigationSYNC system hands free control features if equipped Press i to active the voice recognition feature Refer to Voice A recognition feature in the MyFord Touch MyLincoln Touch supplement Press f to access phone features Refer to Phone features in the MyFord Touch MyLincoln Touch supplement Cluster display control features Some features can be adjusted through the right side of the cluster display Use the right steering wheel control to navigate the screen and press OK to select The following features are available e Entertainment e Change audio source e Limited play list e Navigation if equipped e Redundant center stack display e Routed map e Phone e Redundant center stack display e Favorite contacts e Climate e On Fan speed e e Temperature 106 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF AND POWER SUNSHADES IF EQUIPPED The panoramic Vista Ro
14. CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the childproof door locks are set but the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Insert the key and turn to the lock position key horizontal to engage the childproof locks e Insert the key and turn to the unlock position key vertical to disengage the childproof locks 130 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM The integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs and intelligent access keys A key comply with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather cond
15. Driving WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the stability control light and stability control off light will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system was not manually disabled through the message center If the stability control light and stability control off light still illuminate steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enables each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC
16. Failure to replace timing belt can cause internal engine damage Mnitial replacement at 100 000 miles 160 000 km or 72 months every 50 000 miles 80 000 km or 36 months thereafter Perform a follow up inspection at 120 000 miles 192 000 km 385 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Maintenance schedule log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace 386 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALE
17. Settings cont d Conve Easy Entry Exit nience Locks Autolock Au All Doors or Driver cont d tounlock or Re First mote Unlock Remote Start Climate Control Climate Control Climate Control Climate Control Climate Control Climate Control Quiet Start Quiet Start System Remote Open Wipers oa Sein Wipe Rain Sensing Reverse Wiper 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Settings cont d MyKey 65 mph 105 km h or Off System Hold OK to Re Factory Default Reset set System to Factory Default System Check Oil Life Washer Fluid Doors Liftgate Blind spot Cross Traffic Brakes Fuel The number of warnings will be listed first All active warnings will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list press the right arrow button to display specific information on the highlighted warning System warnings and status messages System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings
18. between the options and to increase decrease AN lt 19 08 gt Vv Note You can also access this screen by pressing Menu gt Clock Language setting To access adjust the language setting press MENU gt Display Settings gt Language LISTENING TO MUSIC Radio Press RADIO to access the radio screen From this screen you can e Press RADIO repeatedly to cycle through AM AM2 AST FM1 FM2 FM3 AST frequency bands e Select the Direct or Tune soft key and scroll to advance up down the frequency band in individual increments 49 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Select the Mute soft key to mute the playing media Press again to return to the playing media e Press K4 to seek to the previous next station e Select the AST Autostore soft key to activate the auto store feature Autostore allows you to store the 10 strongest local stations available from the AM and FM frequency band Press and hold the AST soft key and follow the screen prompts When the search is complete the sound will return and the 10 strongest stations will be stored in the memory presets and overwrite any stations previously stored in the AST band e To save a station in a memory preset tune to the desired station Press and hold the desired preset The sound will briefly mute and then return indicating the station has been saved e View and access your saved presets by pressing A IV or
19. dlers called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a belt properly fit in a child safety seat gener positioning booster ally children who are less than 4 feet seat 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle properly fit in a belt positioning booster safety belt having seat generally children who are at least the lap belt snug 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or and low across the greater than 80 Ib 86 kg or 100 Ib hips shoulder belt 45 kg if recommended by child re centered across straint manufacturer the shoulder and chest and seat back upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when
20. e In Mexico www ford com mx e In Australia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This vehicle s Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this vehicle s Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Lil touching or attempting adjustment of any kind 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents
21. the wiper arm at the heel Hold it there until the next step f 2 Grab the primary structure of the blade with the other hand close to the arm blade joint 3 Grip tightly and press on the arm blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm 4 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place E until a click is heard If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer os ENGINE OIL 92 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 333 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again range the oil level is acceptable e If the oil level is within this DO NOT ADD OIL e If the oil level is below this mark engine oil must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range 1 0 334 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Spec
22. 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with a push button start system refer to Push button start system in this section for ignition modes 1 Off locks the gearshift lever and allows key removal This position also shuts the engine and all electrical accessories off 4 2 Accessory allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartm
23. 3 Power open the liftgate by using the transmitter or the instrument panel control button Note If the power liftgate system is turned off in the message center the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The system will need to be turned on to resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The power liftgate is still operational through the use of the transmitter and instrument panel button when the power liftgate is turned off in the message center 116 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo management system if eguipped The cargo management system consists of storage compartments located in the floor of the rear cargo area 1 To open lift the release handle and the lid 2 To close lower the lid Cargo net if equipped The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area Attach the net to the loops and anchors provided WARNING This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision 117 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Utility hook The utility hook can be used to hang small items such as grocery bags etc Do not hang more than 10 Ib 4 5 kg on the hook D ROOF RACK SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Loads should never be placed directly on th
24. A wide selection of Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These guality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Ford Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Ford Custom Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style e Bug shield eSport stripes e Deflectors e Body kit eSplash guards e Custom graphics Interior style e Ambient lighting e Custom seat covers e Floor mats e Rear seat entertainment e Subwoofer e
25. All shows all features except instantaneous fuel economy Press the right arrow key to reach Trip 2 Press the left arrow to go back to Trip 1 Press and hold OK to reset the current trip distance time average MPG and fuel used Information Scroll up down to highlight one of the options then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that menu option AWD gauge if equipped MyKey distance if MyKey is programmed MyKey information number of MyKeys and admin keys programmed Coolant temperature 21 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Settings In this mode you can view vehicle information and configure different vehicle settings Press the right arrow key When in the Settings menu to reach the different menus Settings Traction Control Blind Spot Collision Warning Sensitivity High Normal or if MyKey is Low programmed Adaptive or Normal Display Measure Units Distance Miles and Gallons or Km and Liters Fahrenheit F or Celsius C DTE Calculation Towing Convenience Off or number of seconds Compass Calibrate Hold OK to e eame Zone 1 15 See the diagram below to determine your magnetic zone DTE Calculation Normal or Towing 22 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location by referring to the zone map if eguipped
26. Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford International Business Development Inc Customer Assistance Center P O Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan Puerto Rico 00922 1957 Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email prcac ford com 318 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P O Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 3326084 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer
27. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Ctems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section 319 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor
28. In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 186 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Wa
29. There may be areas inside your vehicle where the IA key is not detected If the message NO KEY DETECTED appears on your message center when you press the START STOP button it may be necessary to move your IA key to another area within the vehicle The IA key may not be detected near the roof between the driver or passenger sunvisor and 246 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving the roof or in the overhead console area or in the extreme corners of the rear package tray near your audio speakers It is not recommended that you stow the IA key in these locations If you move the IA key to a location where it has been detected before and you still see the NO KEY DETECTED message your IA key s battery may be low or you may be in an area with excessive radio frequency interference If this occurs you can use the back up method to start your vehicle see below Back up method of starting Your TA key uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to start when you press the START STOP button and apply the brake pedal If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the battery in your IA key is low it may be necessary to start your car by inserting the TA key in the back up slot located in the center console Insert the IA key into the slot with buttons facing out and with key ring up After inserting the TA key into the back up slot use the START
30. USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If objects are lodged and or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat e Remove the obstruction s if found e Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated e If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this Owner s Guide WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or a backup tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine m
31. and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty F
32. are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC system includes a traction control off selection located in the message lc center a stability control light and a stability control off light in the instrument cluster Refer to Message center in the Instrument cluster section for more information Both the stability control light and the stability control off light will illuminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check The stability control light may illuminate flash during certain driving conditions which cause the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the stability control light and stability control off light illuminate steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The message center will also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system 253 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the following e A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The stability control light will flash e A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
33. brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs AWD systems if equipped With AWD the vehicle uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of time This will cause the AWD system to overheat If the rear tires stop spinning while the front tires spin in deep sand turn off the vehicle and allow the AWD system to cool down for a minimum of 15 minutes After 284 2011 Edge edg Own
34. e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS All wheel drive AWD system if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time all wheel drive AWD system With the AWD option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which 209 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your veh
35. fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 25 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the charging system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SHIFT TO PARK Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine with the shift select lever in any position other than P Park Refer to Fast restart feature in Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine Check the oil level See Checking the engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHANGE ENG
36. fus Removing the spare tire and jack 1 Lift the carpeted load floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle 2 Remove the spare tire cover if equipped 3 Remove the wing nut securing the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise 4 Remove the washer 5 Lift and remove the temporary spare tire from the cargo area 6 Remove the jack assembly from the vehicle Loosen the bag tabs and remove the jack and lug wrench from the bag 7 Fold down the wrench socket used to loosen the lug nuts and operate the jack Tire change procedure Roadside Emergencies WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the vehicle is in P Park WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission in P Park set the parking brake and block Gn both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 303 Roadside Emergencies WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Note Passenge
37. fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide i oo Roa Bab E e er Pe B ETE Femme Sorts Bakr Multi Point Inspection Report Gard as Recommended by Ford Motor Company Teda Mb on lane me mog wan Ebbi Mison Haberde Mi SYNC L waden e fe J Joi Fike Oktani rei _ erie anan L N trefi rhe Conta utes tu malak afl dar menin cl real J K PLUID LEVELS AMD PILL sede ttt heads e ap a a Oo s amwe i mini asn sasare BATTERY N N NA Sinir af Health Condition 5 EIN pt rst 6 are st bes Ha quipped x te z EEE ann e elen a LI yu YE e m e de ag Lr sipa ATETEA barand aad tata langa Mone any ansing erias DO esin s mestes bs nia dmg OL e ste ts sa cogs E Tri iron xt io bclry powarandei Pa polar CEAN m ar Fe MEARI ATE faa Tr ai A awn L sayas nci moia j O m roai nopia ar C ete ramiz Creer en D an xin mara CORE eter ual OO r ure m __ar CO sir mn j0 Corian Service Advisor see SEN Customer Signature oo N N Tecmizar me 12300000X 310 Sem Ay a NI Kara Wa Sa i a apit Paras Customer Copy 382 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG For your convenience your vehicle is eguipped with a message center which determines the proper oil change service interval You should perform the engine oi
38. hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control 179 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e seat mounted side airbags Refer to Seat mounted side airbag system later in this chapter e safety belt pretensioners e one or more impact and safing sensors e a readiness light and tone e and the electrical wiring which connects the components e Side curtain airbag system Refer to Safety Canopy System later in this chapter e Front passenger sensing system Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter Passenger airbag off or pass
39. monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors driver seat position sensor and front passenger sensing system In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not iluminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Safety belt precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING
40. p yy podd nba JD 1949 pny UO1SSTUSURI oyewome 799dSuJ 3e1p 10 SS3U9S00J Team astou JeuLlouge 10J S1u9uodul09 p r pue sjeoyM 799dSuJ u dop peat sal 012104 t Jnse ur pue Team 9311 P dsur Io pue po oulsue 93ULY x AIOU 99TA19 osueyD TJO 384 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Edge edg USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Perform the services noted in the following table at the specified time mileage km period either within 3 000 miles 5 000 km of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or when the time mileage km reading indicates service is due Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28 751 miles 46 270 km perform the 30 000 mile 48 000 km automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30 000 miles 48 000 km perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25 000 miles 40 000 km 32 000 km 48 000 km if equipped Replace engine air filter Every 100 000 miles Change engine coolant 160 000 km Replace spark plugs Inspect accessory drive belt s Every 150 000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter 240 000 km filter not required on 6F35 6F50 DPS6 and AWF 21 transmissions consult dealer for requirements within the last 100 000 miles 160 000 km Replace timing belt Fiesta
41. rotation flat tire wheel removal etc Lug nut socket Wheel lug nut torque size Bolt size ft lb Lug nut socket size 3 4 100 135 inch 19 mm hex Bolt size 1 2 x 20 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control 306 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle
42. the respective system warning light for additional information Note Some warning lights are reconfigurable telltale RTT indicators These indicators display in the message center and function the same as a warning light but does not display on startup Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle compo
43. when two stage unlocking is disabled intelligent access at the driver s door results in an unlock of all doors not just the driver door Locking the doors amp 1 Press A and release to lock all the doors The parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors and liftgate are closed Note If any door or the liftgate is not closed the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm Press again or turn the ignition to on to deactivate Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off 133 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Opening the power liftgate if equipped X5 Press X5 twice within three seconds to fully unlatch and open the liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using power liftgate control In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate press the control twice If the liftgate stops mid travel it may have detected an obstacle Check to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from
44. 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Rear heated seats if eguipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels To operate the heated seats e Press the indicated side of the control for maximum heat e Press again to deactivate e Press the indicated side of the control for minimum heat e Press again to deactivate The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle While the ignition is in the on position activating the high or low heated seat switch enables heating mode When activat
45. 4 om service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle Refer to your authorized dealer for availability SATELLITE RA DiOo For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels and other features please visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible e Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute You will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your display may show Acquiring to indicate the interference Satellite radio electronic serial number ESN You will need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite rad
46. ACU pm pOpU9ULUL0991 y uey 19470 pmy Aue JO 9S PAIOJUL IIMI S 7991109 OY IUTWLI OJ P O UOUVWUALOfUL OOUDUOJUYDUL POMPIYIS 0 JOJO PMY AT eNOOUMW OSN ATUO PMOYS AT eNOOJYHN 9zmba1 Jey SUOISSTLUSUR I OTYEULOMV osuel Bune19do ewou S YOYSdIp y UO uonearmpur oy Aq 79S oq P NOYsS J949J pm pue pny UOTSSTUISUR1J JO JUNOW UL 191009 y e ul ue Yy mM podd nbo Jt pue 9ZIs 19 009 uo p seq Area Lew suolyeordde swog Apoedeo Y Arp oyewtxoidde Auo soyeorpul gporyea INOA ut peddimbe ATTeurst10 adAy uejoo 3Y PPV YILU UOLO TV 9U PUR V 0E6OZIN SSAA UOHeoyloods p10 Jo syusur mbal ay Joour ATUO p u J10 urSuy royepuewu JOU ST LO LOJOUT PUTA 91 9YJU4S 10 I YJU S Jo asf EAP Suojle3 8 07 Toym JTe yue ong TL32 ALIp T99YM JU0JJ suoyes 761 que fen epeue 6V 9TE8W ASM PIIA J9USEM Pletyspul Cepeued Ayyeng umud q pue q g V LE 0X0 SN u u00 SN V 26 9Z J9USEM PTSTUSPULMA UMUM 61J21910JON TUt9UgnJ Li oxy Jeoy onoylukg C16g 0 s 2uno gI KA AN OVI MGL AVS e H21JJOJON UOT VITFIO0ds p10 ping pombe se mq IOYSeM PT9IYSPUTAM AMY PME Ld WUN I JSULIL IaMog 366 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Edge edg USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA 3 7L V6 Engine Cubic inches Reguired fuel 87 octane Firing order 1 4 2 5 3 6 Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0 049 0 053 inch 0 049 0 053 inch 1 25 1 35 mm 1 2
47. Absence of the intelligent access key Once the vehicle has started the vehicle will remain running until being turned off by the START STOP button even if the IA key is no longer found in the vehicle 247 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Whenever a door is opened and then closed while the vehicle is running the system will search for an IA key inside the vehicle and the message center will display NO KEY DETECTED if the IA key is no longer present This message is a reminder that someone else in the vehicle may have taken the IA key when exiting the vehicle If the IA key is no longer present in the vehicle you will not be able to re start your vehicle outside of the Fast Restart time see Fast Restart Feature above Note It is important to be aware of where your TA key is located in the vehicle to avoid becoming stranded without an IA key Your vehicle may have remote start capability Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating o
48. Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 314 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws Th
49. Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly wi
50. Electrochromic compass temperature interior mirrors 370 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories Lifestyle e Ash cup coin holder eRoof rack and carriers e Navigation eRear bumper protector eCross bars and roof rails e Cargo net eSUV camping tent e Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories e Cargo organization and management Peace of mind eRemote start e Windshield wiper shaker e Keyless entry keypad eBack up camera eCargo security shade e Vehicle tracking and recovery e Wheel locks e Protective seat covers eBumper and hitch mounted parking sensors Ford Licensed Accessories FLA are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific
51. Entertainment Systems Radio options To access more options in radio mode press MENU gt Radio and select from e Scan Select to hear a brief sampling of all available radio stations e Set Category Select to choose a music category You can then search for stations only playing this kind of music e RBDS RDS Text Select to turn Radio Broadcast Digital Signal text on to view additional broadcast data Note This feature defaults to off but it must be turned on in order for you to choose and set a category When this feature is activated all of your text will scroll on one line To see all of your text press the Info soft key Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed SIRIUS satellite radio if equipped Press SIRIUS to access the satellite radio screen From this screen you can Press SIRIUS repeatedly to cycle gt between SATI SAT 2 and SAT 3 ESLUSIARS AUIS 5 17 presets 9 90s A on 9 Select the Direct soft key to access an on screen keypad y Name Ent
52. For your convenience your vehicle is equipped with a message center which determines the proper oil change service interval You should perform the engine oil change as indicated by the instrument cluster message center The message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil change is needed The engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or 500 miles 800 km after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message is displayed Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or 10 000 miles 16 000 km Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter 377 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5 000 miles 8 000 km from your last oil change Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That s why it s important to rely upon your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the mo
53. Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel by the radio The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery 290 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the off position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the on position In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to restart and may take one additional attempt WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a colli
54. Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 341 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 386 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e A coolant concentration of 60 will provide freeze point protection down to 62 F 52 C Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e
55. Printing USA fus Climate Controls To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 8 panel floor 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel Touchscreen features if equipped Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access these features il Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle through the vents 69 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 1 Passenger settings Press DUAL to turn on passenger side temperature control Press the red arrow to increase the temperature and press the blue arrow to decrease the temperature e Press gi to control the heated seat if eguipped Refer to Heated seats in the Seat and Safety Restraints chapter 3 e Fan speed Press to to increase or to decrease fan speed 4 amp Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air
56. STOP button and brake pedal to start your vehicle as usual The vehicle should respond normally as long as the IA key is in the back up slot Once the vehicle is started the IA key can be removed from the back up slot if desired Fast restart feature The Fast Restart feature allows you to re start your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching the vehicle off if a valid IA key is not present when the vehicle is switched off When you switch your vehicle off without an IA key in the passenger compartment or trunk the message RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED will be displayed in the message center You can re start the vehicle by applying the brake pedal and pressing the START STOP button for up to 20 seconds even though the IA key is not present After 20 seconds have expired you can no longer start your vehicle without the IA key present inside the vehicle Switching the vehicle off when not in P Park It is recommended that you shift into the P Park position before switching your vehicle off If you switch your vehicle off with the shifter in any position other than P Park the message SHIFT TO PARK will be displayed in the message center If the vehicle is left in this state your key in ignition chime will activate when the driver door is opened and you may drain your vehicle s battery In order to avoid draining your battery it is recommended that you always shift to P Park before or immediately after switching your vehicle off
57. Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 198 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out AA 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist
58. Stowing the flat spare tire and jack 1 Fully collapse the jack fold the wrench socket into the handle and place them both into the bag making sure to secure the tabs 2 Place the jack assembly in the spare tire well aligning it with the two vertical studs 3 Place the tire in the spare tire well over the jack assembly 305 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies If you are stowing a flat 22 inch tire and wheel assembly temporarily remove the load floor plastic stowage bins if equipped and the foam load floor supports to make space for the 22 inch tire and wheel assembly Place the 22 inch tire amp wheel assembly in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is able to protrude through a wheel opening Replace the plastic stowage bins if equipped and foam load floor supports around the 22 inch tire and wheel assembly If you are stowing a flat tire place the tire in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is able to protrude through a wheel opening If you are stowing the spare tire place the spare in the spare tire well in its original position 4 Secure the wheel by replacing the washer and the wing nut and turning the wing nut clockwise WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance
59. Wheels and Loading Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneve
60. a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the website at www krsaddleshop com or telephone in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464 If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section e Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 327 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many guality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These guality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high gua
61. adjustments and press OK to confirm and close e DSP Occupancy Press gt to enter and press scroll to select from Optimize all Optimize Driver or Optimize Rear When the desired selection is selected press OK to confirm Occupancy mode optimizes sound quality for the chosen seating position CD Options Press MENU gt CD Options to access e Scan All Press to hear a brief selection of all tracks on the current disc e Scan Folder Available when playing an MP3 disc Select for a brief sampling of all the music in the current folder e CD compression Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level CD tips e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e Inspect discs before playing e Clean only with an approved CD cleaner 56 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Wipe discs from the center out e Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Do not clean using a circular motion Note CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player
62. are guardrails freeway concrete walls cyclone fencing sharp turns around a pole or building or coming to a stop with a vehicle directly behind but very close False alerts are temporary and self correct Cross traffic alert CTA system operation The CTA system warns the driver of approaching vehicles when R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is backing out of a front in parking spot It sounds a series of tones and flashes the BLIS indicator found on the exterior mirror on the side of the approaching vehicle Additionally the message center will display either VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT or VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT to warn the driver from which direction vehicles are approaching The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting vehicles in the blind zones The system will not detect infrastructure pedestrians or bicyclists WARNING To help avoid personal injury NEVER use the CTA system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist 277 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The GTA system detects vehicles approaching up to 45 feet 14 meters away Coverage decreases when vehicles and objects in close proximity block the CTA sensors refer to figur
63. arrow key to get to CLEAR MYKEYS 3 Hold OK until you see ALL MYKEYS CLEARED Check MyKey system status The vehicle s message center information menu will provide the status of the following MyKey parameters e MYKEY MILES km This odometer only tracks distance when a MyKey is used If distance does not accumulate as expected then the MyKey is not being used by the intended user The only way to reset this odometer to zero is by clearing MyKey If this odometer is lower than the last time you checked then the MyKey system has been recently cleared e MYKEY S PROGRAMMED Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect deletion of a MyKey 122 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect if an additional spare key has been programmed to the vehicle Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey system warnings displays Using MyKey with remote start systems MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a non Ford approved remote start system The actions proved below do NOT
64. as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Auxiliary input jack line in WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws The auxiliary input jack AIJ provides a way to connect and play music from your portable music player over the vehicle speakers To access 1 Plug in one end of the cable into the AIJ located in your center console 2 Listen to an FM station or a CD first to adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 3 Turn your portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 4 Press AUX repeatedly until Auxiliary audio active or Line in active appears 5 Now adjust the volume on your portable music player until it matches that of the FM station or the CD you were listening to previously 57 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Troubleshooting tips e Don t connect the AIJ to a line level ou
65. b to access a list of your saved presets The display will indicate the preset the station was saved to To exit wait until the menu times out approximately eight seconds or press the RADIO hard button Note You can also manually store stations in the AST band When the AST band is active simply tune to the desired station and press and hold a memory preset The new station will be saved and will override the previously saved station Audio settings To make adjustments to the sound settings press MENU gt Audio Settings to access e SCV Scroll to select Speed Compensated Volume and press OK to enter the menu This feature automatically adjusts the system s volume to compensate for speed and wind noise You can set the system between off and 7 Press OK to confirm and close e Sound Press OK to enter and scroll using the center control to select from Treble Bass Middle Balance Fade When the desired one is chosen press gt to enter Use the center controls to make adjustments and press OK to confirm and close e DSP Occupancy if equipped Press gt to enter and scroll to select from Optimize all Optimize Driver or Optimize Rear When the desired selection is selected press OK to confirm Occupancy mode optimizes sound quality for the chosen seating position e DSP Equalizer if equipped Press gt to enter and select from Stereo or Surround sound 50 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
66. battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced 336 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a batt
67. dealer COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The collision warning with brake support is designed to alert the driver of certain collision risks with a red warning light located above the dashboard and an audible warning chime The brake support assists the driver in reducing the collision speed by pre charging the brakes WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid It is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment or the need to apply the brakes This system does NOT activate the brakes automatically Failure to press the brake pedal to activate the brakes may result in a collision WARNING The collision warning system with brake support cannot help prevent all collisions Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed Note The collision warning with brake support will not detect warn or respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the vehicle 271 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Operation The radar sensor detects vehicles ahead that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle Qo CD If the radar detects that your vehicle is rapidly closing on another vehicle a red warning light will illuminate and an audible warning gt chime will sound z After that if the risk of collision ae further increases after the warning light the brake su
68. dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the Easy Fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km 350 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is egual to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge
69. door trim panel all the doors will lock then all doors will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition using the Bi control on the transmitter or locking the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad only if the front doors are closed If both front doors are closed the vehicle can be locked by any method regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not Smart unlocks for intelligent access keys IA key if equipped The smart unlock feature is intended to prevent you from unintentionally locking your IA key inside your vehicle s passenger compartment or rear cargo area When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door lock control with the door open vehicle in park and ignition off after you close the door the vehicle will search for an IA key in the passenger compartment If an IA key is found inside the vehicle all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will chirp indicating that the IA key is inside In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the IA key inside the vehicle you can lock your vehicle using your keyless entry keypad or using the control on another IA key Refer to Keyless entry system in this chapter for more information on keyless entry keypad operation 126 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security If your vehi
70. e Engaged green light Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged Door ajar RTT Displays when the ignition is on and any door is open Tailgate ajar RTT Displays when the ignition is on and the lt trunk is open Low washer fluid Illuminates i a i when the windshield washer fluid is Gi Ci 16 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Turn signal Iluminates when the left or right turn signal or the a o gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators flash faster check for a burned out bulb High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on D Heads up display if equipped yl A red beam of lights will illuminate on the windshield in certain instances when using adaptive O cruise control and or the collision warning system It will also illuminate momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works See Using adaptive cruise control in the Driving chapter for more information Grade assist RTT Illuminates when grade assist is turned on g Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Par
71. energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accide
72. engages automatically when MAX A C is selected on can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except 47 defrost Recirculated air may turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential 5 MAX A C Press to distribute recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This is more economical and efficient than normal A C mode Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press again for normal A C operation 6 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in MAX A C G7 defrost and amp floor defrost 7 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow distribution A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to reach the desired temperature 8 Pay Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster This button will also activate deactivate the heated mirror if equipped Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 70 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 9 447 Defrost Press to distribute outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of f
73. engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power steering fluid level Check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e An improperly inflated tire e Uneven tire wear e Loose or worn suspension components e Loose or worn steering components e Improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock BSI feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays i
74. entry transmitter A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight coded keys can be IKTs with remote entry functionality The intelligent access key functions as both a programmed key that operates the driver door lock activates intelligent access with push 142 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security button start systems as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your vehicle If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys KTs only are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare integrated keyhead transmitter IKT keys If you have a intelligent access keys refer to Programming spare intelligent access keys in this section You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter portion of the IKT to your v
75. fastened in the buckle e p 166 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints xx 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle Restraint of pregnant women WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See figure below Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Safety belt locking modes All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5
76. faults that may cause the associated left or right alert indicator not to illuminate only the message center faults will occur Blocked sensor An extreme build up of materials on the quarter panel fascias such as mud or snow can cause degraded performance of the BLIS Also heavy rain can cause the same effect The BLIS can detect this degraded performance and issue a blocked warning to the driver via the message center If a condition is determined by the system the message center displays BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE or CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE warning and the appropriate left and or right exterior mirror alert indicator will illuminate The message center warning may be cleared by the driver but the exterior mirror alert indicator will remain illuminated WARNING Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver the number of missed objects will increase To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist Once the blockage is removed the system will require some driving time and detection of at least two vehicle objects prior to resetting or the driver can cycle the ignition key If however blockage is still present after the key cycle the system will sense again that it is blocked after driving in traffic 280
77. feature Note Your vehicle is also equipped with touchscreen climate control features To access press the lower right corner of the touchscreen Refer to Touchscreen features later in this section for more information Temperature conversion To access the temperature setting press Menu on the touchscreen Then press Settings gt System gt Temperature Select to view the temperature in either Fahrenheit and Celsius 64 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 1 A C control Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO Q defrost and lt A floor defrost 2 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 3 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except QQ defrost Recirculated air may turn off automatically in al
78. fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 329 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood latch that is located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood and support it with the prop
79. for some reason the system fails to start the horn will chirp Note If eguipped with an IKT you must turn the ignition on before driving the vehicle If equipped with an IA transmitter you must press the START STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving the vehicle The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the radio will not turn on The parking lamps will remain on and the engine will run for 5 10 or 15 minutes depending on how you programmed the system To select the duration of the remote start system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Extending the engine run time To keep the engine running for another remote start duration repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the engine still running If you programmed the duration to last 10 minutes the second 10 minutes will begin immediately so that for example if the vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes the engine will continue to run for a total of 15 minutes You can only extend the remote start once The ignition must be turned on and then back off or allow one hour to pass before using remote start again Turning the engine off after using remote start e Press one time The parking lamps will turn off You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running engine You can disable or enable the remot
80. for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Trailer tow connector vehicles equipped with a Class II trailer tow prep package The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper on the driver s side of the vehicle Refer to the following chart for information regarding the factory equipped trailer tow connector 1 Dark Green Right turn signal brake lamp hazard flasher 2 Yellow Left turn signal brake lamp hazard flasher Tail lamps parking lamps 239 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle s bumper or attach to the axle You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the hook retainers on the vehicle To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Be sure your trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal regulations regarding trailer braking If your trailer is equipped with electronically controlled brakes you will ne
81. have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 308 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal p
82. improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death 194 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administrati
83. in front seat 196 O 373 376 IM z he sacian 196 Getting assistance outside the LATCH erersiniz 200 U S and Canada o 317 recommendations 194 Getting roadside assistance 289 Child safety seats booster Getting the service you SCALES E E E E T 205 need rem 313 Cleaning your vehicle e additional owner s 319 engine compartment 322 G ae ne ee eee instrument panel 324 Utilizing the i ument panel Mediation Arbitration MCETIOT sadiyeiamesisin iin giin 325 Prostam 317 plastic parts 323 ETAN e safety belts 325 D A gb ennan 321 WAKING ss YE KM EO 321 wheels s o ae lamps a wiperblades 323 eee aa Bn yemini Climate control Dip Aes tict a i see Air conditioning or m e in li 357 LE RAL a Dye ENGINE gil esasi isen 333 G G an a ai 49 i Driving under special Collision Warning System 271 conditions 265 283 286 CONSOLE alya all e kei leme 91 sand aeteseeneeneessesneeneeneeseeenes 284 oyerhead serdar saire iner deri 90 SNOW and CE eee 286 through water 285 288 Controls power seal 152 E steering column 105 Gonvertible Electronic message center 19 30 CLEANING Gin es 324 Emergencies roadside Coolant jump starti
84. is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was travelling and e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless p
85. is obtained If coolant is filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is not cool the system will remain underfilled 339 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liguids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and new unused coolant together in the vehicle Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or a
86. make MyKey compatible with non Ford approved remote start system but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey functions Vehicles equipped with traditional keys When using a non Ford approved remote start system the default settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its associated privileges This makes it NOT compatible with MyKey The following action may help you to retain some MyKey functions 1 Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition cylinder 2 In addition to the key that you have already programmed as a MyKey owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys may want to program the non Ford approved remote start system as a MyKey if the remote start fob is used by the MyKey driver To program a non Ford approved remote start system as MyKey do the following 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using a non Ford approved remote start fob 3 Follow steps 1 4 in the Create a MyKey section Vehicles equipped with an intelligent access key push button start e It is not possible to program any remote start system as MyKey on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key push button start Therefore you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other admin key When the vehicle is started using remote start the system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle into gea
87. mph 167 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to use the automatic locking mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode 168 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to disengage the au
88. new key valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle s engine and will operate the remote entry system if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter The theft indicator light will iluminate for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming If the key was not successfully programmed it will not start your vehicle s engine and or will not operate the remote entry features The theft indicator light may flash on and off Wait 20 seconds and you may repeat Steps 1 through 8 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key s programmed To program additional new unprogrammed key s wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 Note To program MyKey features refer to MyKey in this chapter Programming spare intelligent access keys if equipped If you have integrated keyhead transmitters IKT or standard SecuriLock coded keys refer to Programming spare integrated keyhead transmitter IKT keys in this section You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside the vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily accessible If two previously programmed keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your aut
89. obstruction and reset the power assist by manually closing the liftgate Normal operation can then be resumed WARNING Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle Memory feature seat and mirrors if equipped The integrated keyhead transmitter IKT or intelligent access key JA key allows you to recall the memory seat and power mirrors feature Press 2 to automatically move the seat and power mirrors to the desired memory position The mirrors will move to the programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position The seat will move to the final position when the ignition is switched out of off if easy entry feature is enabled Programming the memory feature to the transmitter To activate this feature 1 Move the driver seat and power mirrors to the desired positions using the associated controls 2 Press and hold button 1 for five seconds A tone will be heard after about two seconds confirming Ly eff memory position has been set Continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 3 Within three seconds press A 134 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 4 Press 2 i 5 Repeat this procedure for memory 2 and another transmitter if desir
90. off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle through the vents Turn to adjust the temperature for either the driver side of the vehicle dual zone or the entire vehicle cabin single zone if the passenger side temperature is not activated 10 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will 63 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls automatically determine fan speed airflow distribution A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 11 Manual override controls Press repeatedly to toggle through the settings and manually choose one of the following air distribution modes e Y Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts demister outlets and the front and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents demister vents and the front and rear seat floor vents e Distributes air through the demister vents and front and rear seat floor vents e i Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console vents Dual Automatic Temperature Control DATC Sony system if equipped Note Your climate control system is touch sensitive You need only lightly touch the control graphic to activate the
91. or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines PANORAMIC ROOF DEFLECTOR IF EQUIPPED Vacuum the wind deflector cloth to remove insects amp loose dirt Clean with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection 324 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Donot use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens e Donot allow air freshe
92. paddle shifters on the steering wheel or the toggle switch on the gearshift lever Gearshift lever toggle switch e To manually downshift the transmission with the gearshift lever in M Manual press on the gearshift lever e To manually upshift the transmission with the gearshift lever in M Manual press on the gearshift lever 262 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Paddle shifters Sport The paddle shifters allow you to shift gears quickly without taking your hands off the steering wheel Temporary manual control is provided when pulling the paddles with the gearshift in the D Drive position The system will determine when temporary manual control is no longer desired and reverts back to automatic control Extensive manual control can be achieved by moving the shifter to the M Manual position The system will stay in manual control until the shifter is moved out of the manual position e To manually downshift the transmission pull the paddle e To manually upshift the transmission pull the paddle Recommended shift speeds Upshift according to the following chart recommended for best fuel economy The message center display in the instrument cluster will show the current selected gear you are in In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM which may cause it to stall the SST will automatically make some downshifts even if it has determi
93. properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 193 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH LATCH y Cower dower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Weight and Rear Up to facing 48 Ib x x child seat 21 kg Forward Up to facing 48 Ib x x x child seat 21 kg Forward Over facing 48 Ib x x child seat 21 kg WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is
94. refer to Push button start system in this section for starting 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start 2 Turn the key to 4 start then 4 release the key as soon as the engine begins cranking Your vehicle 1 has a computer assisted cranking system that assists in starting the engine After releasing the key from the 4 start position the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off position 3 After idling for a few seconds release the parking brake apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the vehicle to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel 245 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Push button start system if eguipped If your vehicle is equipped with the push button start system you can start your vehicle by pressing the start button in combination with the brake pedal rather than using a key The start button is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering whe
95. relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA AB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 211 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature ABC The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
96. s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with informational messages and or warnings The message center is also used to program configure the different features of your vehicle The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Use the left steering wheel controls to navigate through the message center Press the up down arrow buttons to move up down through the message center choices Press the left right arrow buttons to move left right through the message center choices Press the OK button to select highlighted options and confirm choices messages 20 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Main menu Scroll up down to highlight one of the options then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that menu option Trip Computer 1 or 2 Trip distance shows the accumulated trip distance Trip time shows the elapsed trip time This timer will stop when the vehicle is turned off and will restart when the vehicle is restarted Miles kilometers to empty shows the approximate distance the vehicle can travel before running out of fuel Instant MPG L 100km shows instantaneous fuel usage Average MPG L 100km shows the average distance traveled per unit of fuel used for a given trip Fuel used shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip
97. section following Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates RSC the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the RSC system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle The RSC system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following 255 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system select traction control off in the message center Full features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system can be restored by selecting traction control on or by turning off and restarting the engine If you switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the
98. section in the MyFord Touch supplement for more information Easy entry exit feature if equipped This feature automatically moves the driver s seat rearward 2 in 5 cm when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the key is removed from the ignition cylinder or the push button start system if equipped is switched off refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter The seat will move to the original position when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the key is placed in the ignition cylinder or when the push button start system if equipped is put in accessory mode refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Folding down the front passenger seatback if equipped The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for a long load To fold the seatback 1 Move the seat as far back as possible 2 Push the head restraint release button and move the head restraint fully down 156 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Pull up on the recliner handle located on the outboard side of the seat to fold the front passenger seatback 4 Without releasing the handle push the seatback forward 5 Move the seat as far forward as possible
99. severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second or third row seats The safety canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The Safety Canopy System is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to close an electrical circuit that initiates safety canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor 189 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The safety canopy is mounted to roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain lateral collisions or rollover events the Safety Canopy System will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The safety canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the safety canopy did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The safety canopy is designed to inflate in certain side imp
100. short distance It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive or damage the AWD system Note The AWD OFF message may also be displayed in the message center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front wheel drive This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip such as deep sand To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible stop the vehicle in a safe location and allow it to idle The AWD OFF message will turn off when the system cools and normal AWD function returns Note The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Driving off highway with AWD vehicles AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway When driving at slow speeds off highway under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation wil
101. stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for VM testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuo
102. then unlock to confirm that your personal entry code has been programmed to the module Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code 140 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the 2 control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your integrated keyhead transmitter e the ignition is turned on Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note If the two stage unlocking feature is disabled all doors will unlock for more information r
103. to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate Controls chapter for more information In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle please refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle Front wheel drive FWD vehicles Tow your FWD vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider All wheel drive AWD vehicles Tow your AWD vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer Do not tow your AWD vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly and the rear wheels on the ground this will cause damage to your AWD system If you are using a vehicle transport trailer follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider Note If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground follow these instructions e Tow only in the forward direction e Release the parking brake e Place the transmission shift lever in N Neutral Place the ignition in the accessory position refer to Starting in the Driving chapter e Do not exceed 65 mph 105 km h Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and at each fuel stop 242 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide
104. to Y HH H 20 abd con 5 10 or 30 minutes Refer to BM Em Settings to configure the history 32 time 01234 5mi When the fuel level becomes low 50 miles 80 km to empty the level indicator will change to amber When the fuel level becomes critically low 0 miles 0 km to empty the level indicator will change to red If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 36 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster To determine your average highway fuel economy do the following 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press RESET in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Settings In this mode you can configure different
105. to any position to stop the window operation Bounce back When the window is moving upward and an obstacle or a rough road condition interferes with the window s movement the window will automatically reverse direction and move down This is known as bounce back If the ignition is turned off without accessory delay being active during bounce back the window will move down until the bounce back position is reached Security override To override a bounce back condition within two seconds after the window reaches the bounce back position pull and hold the switch up and the window will travel up with no bounce back or pinch protection If the switch is released before the window is fully closed the window will stop For example this can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver and front passenger to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver and front passenger press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Accessory delay With accessory delay the audio system power windows and moon roof if equipped operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from
106. vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent 323 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause sgucaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC 37 A B D or F in Canada available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge
107. vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to c
108. weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician 371 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 372 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS U S ONLY More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty c
109. with a portable fuel container see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system as it can be damaged You must use the included funnel in such circumstances WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank all of which could result in serious personal injury JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage 307 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may
110. you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 217 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors
111. 11 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Mind
112. 13 heated sierra kaman 161 label sase aklar 225 memory seat 134 155 replacing EM insni 217 Second row power fold seat 158 rotating Ferrik sseeaeesnecnneeenecsssonessess 219 safety practices 218 SecuriCode keyless entry sidewall information 220 system a erases a ala e la a asil ere 140 SNOW tires and chains AMA 230 SecuriLock passive anti theft Spate LE iskemisi 300 303 system 141 terminology Zo sdesisanvesdovacnecseianare 212 vae t regrades 212 ve your vehicle 00 329 treadwear 211 216 Settingtheclock 49 Mucidi SOS Post Crash Alert 191 climate eee R 69 Spare tire TOVINE reene ciate 238 see Changing the Tire 303 recreational towing 242 Spark plugs specifications 363 trailer tOWING 238 367 wrecker 311 Transmission 260 Specification chart lubricants 2st oust EYE 364 brake shift interlock BSD 258 fluid checking and addin Speedcontrol 95 automatic bi ii gt 357 Starting your vehicle 243 245 fluid refill capacities 364 jump starting 307 lubricant specifications 364 push button start system 246 Tum signal
113. 5 1 35 mm Compression ratio 10 3 1 Engine drivebelt routing 3 5L 3 7L V6 engine 1 Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine 2 Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine 367 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO i DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG that a Safety Comp liance FRONT GAWR XXXL REAR GAWR XXXL Certification Label be affixed to a XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX KXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES vehicle and prescribe where the KOLO RIMS XXXXXX RIMS Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAX CPSLGOLD J ATXXK KPaIXX PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR li ification Labela VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Compliance Certification abe 1S EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar Ky ae ee by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s ir KA OA AA door EXT PNT XX RCXX DSO WB BRK TINTTR PPS R TANE TR SPR XXXXK XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel Please note that in
114. 7 fluid refill capacities 364 fluid specification 364 Selectshift SST 262 Auxiliary input jack Line in 57 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Auxiliary power point 91 Axle lubricant specifications 364 B Battery sekis ar ar 336 acid treating emergencies 336 jumping a disabled battery 307 maintenance free 336 replacement specifications 363 e e he in n a e 336 Belt Minder 172 Blind Spot Information SYSU MM A A E E 275 Blind spot Mirror 274 Boosterseats 205 Brakes seaside sadekar enez 250 Ce 9 e e RE A 250 anti lock brake system ABS warning light 251 fluid checking and adding 357 fluid refill capacities 364 fluid specifications 364 lubricant specifications 364 DALKUING sisin a bar 251 shiftinterlock 258 BUDS remake asi 81 C Capacities for refilling fluids 364 Cargo management system 117 Cargo Neb mearra 117 Cell phone use 9 Changing a tire 300 303 397 Index Childsafetyseats 196 Cupholder s 160 attaching with tether Customer Assistance 289 straps ESE ETE E DE TENS 202 Ford Extended Service
115. 8 148 162 176 191 209 211 213 226 231 238 242 243 243 250 252 260 265 267 289 289 290 291 291 300 306 307 311 313 320 320 321 Table of Contents Maintenance and Specifications 329 Engine compartment 331 Engine oil 333 Battery 336 Engine coolant 338 Fuel information 344 Air filter s 359 Part numbers 363 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 364 Engine data 367 Accessories 370 Ford Extended Service Plan 373 Scheduled Maintenance Guide 377 Normal scheduled maintenance and log 383 Index 397 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2010 Ford Motor Company 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Motor Company product Please take the time to get well acguainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca
116. A fus Instrument Cluster ADAPTIVE CRUISE MALFUNCTION if eguipped Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE if equipped Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED if equipped Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve FRONT SENSOR NOT ALIGNED if equipped Displayed when the adaptive cruise system detects the front sensor is not aligned correctly See your authorized dealer for service COLLISION WARN CHIME ON OFF if equipped Displays the collision warning chime status COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE if equipped Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED if equipped Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of the radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve COLLISION WARNING MALFUNCTION if equipped Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED if equipped Displayed when the blind spot informa
117. A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance Guide 393 Scheduled Maintenance Guide EXCEPTIONS In addition there are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule They are listed below Normal vehicle axle maintenance C Rear axles and power take off PTO units containing synthetic lubricant and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected service is re quired or the axle assembly has been submerged in water The axle and PTO lubricant should be changed anytime the axle and PTO have been submerged in water During extended trailer tow operation above 70 F 21 C ambient and wide open throttle for extended periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axle lubricants should be replaced every 3 000 miles 4 800 km or three months whichever occurs first The 3 000 mil
118. ANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable lit components in the vehicle during headlamp and parking lamp operation e Tap the top or bottom of the control to brighten dim all interior lit components incrementally or kaka e Pressand hold the top or bottom of the control until the desired lighting level is reached Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer control reguires re calibration Press the dimmer control from the full dim position to the full on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions Dome lamp control Use to manually turn the dome lamp on e Press the control This will turn on the interior courtesy lights The lights will remain on until the control is pressed again AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer tht 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bu
119. CV and press OK to enter the menu This feature automatically adjusts the system s volume to compensate for speed and wind noise You can set the system between off and 7 Press OK to confirm and close e Sound Press OK to enter and scroll using the center control to select from Treble Bass Middle Balance Fade When the desired one is chosen press gt to enter Use the center controls to make adjustments and press OK to confirm and close e DSP Occupancy if equipped Press gt to enter and press scroll to select from Optimize all Optimize Driver or Optimize Rear When the desired selection is selected press OK to confirm Occupancy mode optimizes sound quality for the chosen seating position e DSP Equalizer if equipped Press gt to enter and select from Stereo or Surround sound 52 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems SIRIUS options To access other options in SIRIUS mode press MENU gt SIRIUS Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels Show ESN Select to view your Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS to activate modify or track your satellite radio account Channel Guide Select to view a listing of available satellite radio channels Press OK or to enter the Channel Guide and then scroll through available channels In this guide you can choose to Tune Channel Skip Channel or Lo
120. Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http Mwww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercayr gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 or online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx 320 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are d
121. Driving chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 130 KM H Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information STARTING SYSTEM FAULT This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting security system your vehicle will not be able to start See your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE AT TOP SPEED OF MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information WAIT XZ MINUTES Displays time required before security access is granted to program keys CHECK ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS if equipped Displayed when an error is detected in the adaptive headlamps system AUTOMATIC BRAKING TURNED OFF if equipped Displayed when adaptive cruise control automatic braking is turned off 28 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing US
122. ED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp 89 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Slide on rod feature Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package Storage compartment The storage compartment may be used to store a pair of sunglasses Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the storage compartment The door will open to the full open position 90 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CENTER CONSOLE Your vehicle may be eguipped with a variety of console features These include 1 Cupholders 2 Two pen pencil holders travel tissue pack holder and business card paper holder Gf equipped located on underside of console lid 3 Rear power point 4 Utility compartment with in bin power point audio input jack and a removable coin holder tray two grooves on tray slide onto tracks in main bin WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12V DC Power outlets are designed for accessory p
123. ED The liftgate area is only intended for cargo not passengers To open the liftgate press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate then pull on the outside handle e Exercise care when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area The liftgate could be damaged against a garage door low ceiling or wall e Do not hang anything bike rack etc from the spoiler glass or liftgate Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components e Do not leave the liftgate open while driving Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle 112 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate door open keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air comes into the vehicle Liftgate ajar signal If the liftgate is not fully latched you will receive a LIFTGATE AJAR message on the instrument panel If you see this message check the liftgate door to ensure it is fully latched Note In the event of a power failure the latch can be accessed and released from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim POWER LIFTGATE IF EQUIP
124. INE OIL SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 ENGINE COOLANT OVER TEMP Displayed when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information 26 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus In
125. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly 165 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel x r it latch Make sure the tongue is UU securely
126. Lincoln Mercury dealership carry a nationwide 12 months 12 000 mile 20 000 km parts and labor limited warranty Your dealer can give you details Value shopping for your vehicle s maintenance needs Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and light repair automotive services With factory trained technicians and one stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire rotations to repairs like brake service check out the value your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealers can offer WHICH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SHOULD YOU FOLLOW Owner checks and services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated Service information and supporting specifications are provided in this Owner s Guide 379 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer or gualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service advice The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered by warranties so you may be charged for labor parts or lubricants used Maximum oil change interval C As indicated by the instrument cluster message center can be up to one year or 10 000 miles 16 000 km Engine coolant change interval 6 years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km change engine coolant whichever comes first A
127. NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e A coolant concentration of 40 will provide freeze point protection down to 12 F 24 C Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain 342 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The service engine soon tc symbol will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle wil
128. NIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a universal garage door opener which can be used to replace the common hand held transmitter HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to TY replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O O 6 device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting WARNING When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage 108 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as reguired by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipp
129. PED You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls e Instrument panel control button e Transmitter button e Outside liftgate control button e Control button in the rear cargo area Opening and closing the power liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING Keep keys out of reach of children Do not allow children to play near an open or moving power liftgate The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P Park When the liftgate is being power closed a chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to power close A single chime indicates a problem with the close request caused by e the ignition is in on and the transmission is not in P Park e or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage e or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request a fast continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut 113 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls failure If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster chime have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the power system will permit This will activate the obstacle detection feature Note Cycling the ignition prior to
130. R VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance Guide 387 Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace 388 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Scheduled Maintenance Guide SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your Ford Lincoln Mercury vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding Special Operating Conditions listed below you will need to have some items maintained more frequently If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier As reguired Change engine oil and replace oil filter as indicat
131. RAMMED 4 KEYS TOTAL Displayed during spare key programming when a fourth Intelligent Access Key is programmed to the system MAX NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been programmed MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when MyKey is active MYKEY NOT CREATED Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed 27 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster NO KEY DETECTED if equipped Displayed if the Intelligent Access Key is not detected by the system in the following three scenarios e When the start stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through the ignition states e When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed e When the vehicle s speed exceeds 10 mph 16 km h for the first time after starting Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information PRESS BRAKE TO START if equipped Displayed when the start stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied This is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start stop button is pressed in order to start the engine RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED if equipped Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle Refer to Push button start system in the
132. S is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 226 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCG rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This dev
133. S then MYKEY by pressing OK button or the right arrow button 2 Press OK to select CREATE MYKEY 121 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Hold the OK button as prompted until you see a message that the key is restricted MyKey M is successfully programmed Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys Note To program the optional settings go to Step 2 in the Programming MyKey Optional Settings section If your vehicle is equipped with remote start see the Using MyKey with remote start systems section Note All MyKeys can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was created otherwise an admin key is required to clear the MyKey programming To clear all MyKeys go to Step 2 in the Clear MyKey section Programming MyKey optional settings Turn the ignition on using an admin key To program the optional settings use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Get into main menu select SETTINGS then MYKEY by pressing the OK button or the right arrow button 2 Use the up and down arrow buttons to get to any optional feature 3 Press the right arrow button to bring up settings of each item 4 Press OK button or right arrow button to make your choice Clear MyKey To reset all MyKeys as admin keys do the following 1 At the main menu screen select SETTINGS then MYKEY by pressing OK or the right arrow key 2 Press the down
134. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 18 Message center 19 Entertainment Systems 48 MyFord system 48 Auxiliary input jack Line in 57 MyFord Touch system 58 Climate Controls 60 Manual heating and air conditioning 60 Automatic temperature control 62 Touchscreen features 69 Rear window defroster 72 Lights 75 Headlamps 75 Turn signal control 79 Bulb replacement 81 Driver Controls 87 Windshield wiper washer control 87 Steering wheel adjustment 89 Power windows 92 Mirrors 93 Speed control 95 Adaptive cruise control 97 Locks and Security 119 Keys 119 Locks 126 Anti theft system 141 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Ghild restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes AdvanceTrac Transmission operation Reverse sensing system Rear view camera system Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher control Fuel pump shut off Fuses and relays Changing tires Wheel lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects U S only Reporting safety defects Canada only Cleaning 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 14
135. The inlet may have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing At the next opportunity safely pull off the road turn off the engine open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel see Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the check fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury bp 347 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 1096 ethanol Do not us
136. While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is on all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to accessory and e the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off or to accessory 128 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure if equipped or e or by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is off
137. able load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off highway usage 287 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom 4 of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is
138. acing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time Passenger airbag status indicator The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator which will illuminate PASS Al RB AG indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either ON enabled or OFF disabled The indicator OFF lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel Note The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is functional The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the ON lamp then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following th
139. act collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover WARNING If the Safety Canopy System has deployed the safety canopy will not function again unless replaced The Safety Canopy System including the A B C and D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the safety canopy is not replaced it will not function again which will increase the risk of injury in a future collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required 190 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness airbag light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system ma
140. action required The programming in process may take up to progress three minutes Call SIRIUS Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 been deactivated by 1 888 539 7474 to SIRIUS Satellite re activate or resolve Radio subscription issues No Channels All the channels in Using the channel guide Available the selected category unlock or unskip the are skipped or locked channels Subscription SIRIUS has updated No action required Updated the channels available for your vehicle 55 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Playing a disc Press CD to access the disc screen From this screen you can e Press K 1 to access the CD previous next track e Press B gt II to play pause a 2 12 track 0 12 e Select the Repeat soft key to pil repeat the current song Repeat Shuffle e Select the Shuffle soft key to shuffle the songs on the current disc Audio settings Press MENU gt Audio Settings to access e SCV Scroll to select Speed Compensated Volume and press OK to enter the menu This feature automatically adjusts the system s volume to compensate for speed and wind noise You can set the system between off and 7 Press OK to confirm and close e Sound Press OK to enter and scroll using the center control to select from Treble Bass Middle Balance Fade When the desired one is chosen press gt to enter Use the center controls to make
141. activate deactivate the heated mirrors if equipped Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 11 G7 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection To return to full automatic control touch AUTO Dual Automatic Temperature Control DATC system with MyTemp if equipped Note Your climate control system is touch sensitive You need only lightly touch the control graphic to activate the feature Note Your vehicle is also equipped with touchscreen climate control features To access press the lower right corner of the touchscreen Refer to Touchscreen features later in this section for more information Temperature conversion To access the temperature setting press Menu on the touchscreen Then press Settings gt System gt Temperature Select to view the temperature in either Fahrenheit and Celsius 1 Passenger temperature control Touch to activate dual zone temperature and to increase or decrease the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle DUAL Touch to activate dual zone separate passenger temperature control Touch again to deactivate and return to single zone temperature control where the driver settings control the temperature for the entire vehicle 66 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st P
142. ad The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 232 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me sat__ counme messin SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 Psi ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT MN Gm am e BEN TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1 ARRI RE 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492 kg or Le poids total des occupan
143. afety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash WARNING The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags seat mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy System and safety belt pretensioners 169 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611022 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments at the front outboard A seating positions Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder 4 To adjust the shoulder belt height pull on the cente
144. afety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained 201 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 460 mm 18 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unles
145. aintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light amp e for front and side airbag system will either flash or stay lit SN e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired 184 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system 40 WARNING Do not place objects or mount eguipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the ai
146. airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag backup power the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate 180 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward f
147. al of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 224 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire S ZE RAR Maksls0016 Toy Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on Ass cars SUVs minivans and light Ay S 09 8 FO trucks Vo asn 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label Yo
148. an also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after turning the ignition off Automatic disarming Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle Replacement of integrated keyhead transmitters IKT or intelligent access keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs or two intelligent access keys The integrated keyhead transmitter IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle as well as a remote keyless
149. ance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 208 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS Crossover vehicles handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Crossover vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers
150. and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Turn the ignition on OAN 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition off 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back on The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition off The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 129 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Keyless eniry keypad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Close all the doors ie 6 4 6 6 7 8 9 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8a second time 5 Releasethe3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled
151. and non abrasive cleaner When towing the reverse camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen Fixed guidelines visual park aid alert and manual zoom features are only available when the vehicle is in R Reverse If the vehicle is in R Reverse and the liftgate is ajar no rear video camera features will be displayed A message will be displayed on the touchscreen if the liftgate is ajar After activating or deactivating a rear video camera feature the touchscreen will show a preview of the feature s selected 269 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the camera system WARNING The rearview camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still reguires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle WARNING When manual zoom is enabled Lev
152. and turn the dial to increase decrease the temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle Press again to deactivate passenger temperature control and return to single zone temperature control where the driver settings control the temperature for the entire vehicle 4 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 5 Fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed 6 a Heated seats if equipped Press to activate deactivate the driver or passenger heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 7 Gj Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear defroster This button will also activate deactivate the heated mirrors if equipped Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 8 GU Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection To return to full automatic control touch AUTO 9 Q Power Driver temperature control Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is
153. approved remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Cannot program e Key in the ignition is a MyKey the MyKey e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle optional settings Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a non Ford approved remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section 124 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Potential Causes Cannot clear e Key in the ignition is a MyKey MyKey e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a non Ford approved remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Lost the only e Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer admin key Lost any key e For programming spare keys refer to the Programming spare keys section in this chapter I accidentally e Vehicle has a non Ford approved remote start programmed all system that is recognized as an admin key Refer to keys as the Using MyKey with remote start systems MyKeys section to reset all MyKeys as admin keys No MyKey e An admin intelligent access key is present at a function push and start vehicle e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey sect
154. arked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent ae ee and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately 2 3 inches 5 8 cm One touch up or down driver s window only This feature allows the driver s window to open or close fully without holding the control down To operate one touch down press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation 92 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To operate one touch up pull the switch completely up to the second detent and release quickly The window will close fully Momentarily press the switch
155. arry that much weight In metric units the 237 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow option package Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension For your safety and to maximize vehicle performance be sure to use the proper equipment while towing Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing e Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer Refer to the instructions included with towing ac
156. art of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 309 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal
157. ated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information 227 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system Low tire Possible Customer action required pressure warning light Solid warning 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure tires light are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufac turer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on
158. ating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 197 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
159. attery housing cavity 135 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 5 Snap the battery cover back onto the key Intelligent access key IA key 1 Remove the backup key from the transmitter then twist a thin coin in the slot hidden behind the backup key slot to remove the battery cover Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board 2 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 3 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the IA key for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 4 Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT or TA key to become de programmed from your vehicle They should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost intelligent access keys IA keys If you would like to have your IA keys reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your intelligent access keys IA keys To program new IA keys yourself refer to SecuriLock8 passive anti theft system in t
160. c climate control For hot weather conditions e The interior cabin will be cooled to 72 F 22 C e The cooled seats Gf equipped will be set to high For cold weather conditions e The interior cabin will be heated to 72 F 22 C e The heated seats Gif equipped will be set to high e Rear defrost heated mirrors Gf equipped will be activated For moderate weather conditions e The interior cabin will be heated cooled or off based upon the previous operating state last ignition on cycle e Heated cooled seats if equipped will be deactivated e Rear defrost heated mirrors if equipped will be deactivated 73 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls CABIN AIR FILTER IF EQUIPPED The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle The presence of a particulate filter element provides the following benefits e Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration e Improves the interior compartment cleanliness e Protects the climate control components from particle deposits Note A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system If your vehicle is not equipped with a cabin air filter a protecti
161. cabin air filter if equipped required Replace engine air filter Every 300 hours of engine Change engine oil and replace oil filter Fiesta operation Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except Fiesta and vehicles equipped with a 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Replace spark plugs Engine hour meter installation is recommended for these operating conditions Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified time mileage km period either within 3 000 miles 5 000 km of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or when the time mileage km reading indicates service is due Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28 751 miles 46 270 km perform the 30 000 mile 48 000 km automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30 000 miles 48 000 km perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25 000 miles 40 000 km 390 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Replace engine air filter Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal no
162. ce over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes When the approaching vehicle is at a distance its image is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror As the vehicle approaches the image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror 1 As the vehicle approaches its image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror 2 As the vehicle leaves the blind spot mirror it will transition to the driver s peripheral field of view 8 274 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM BLIS WITH CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT CTA IF EQUIPPED The BLIS is a convenience feature that aids the driver in assessing whether a vehicle is within an area on either side of the vehicle extending rearward from the outside mirrors to approximately 10 feet 8 meters beyond the bumper This area is referred to as the blind zone The BLIS will alert the driver to the presence of motorized vehicles in these areas while driving on roads and freeways The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting vehicles in the blind zones The system will not detect infrastructure pedes
163. ce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection 9 D Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle through the vents Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather select Gi defrost or GA floor defrost e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with A recirculated air engaged and A C off e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected 61 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls For maximum cooling performance in MAX A C mode 1 Select MAX A C 2 Move temperature control selector to the coolest setting 3 Set the fan to the highest speed initially As the interior starts to cool down adjust the fan speed to maintain comfort To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 8 panel floor 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature con
164. ce your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 206 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child
165. cessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing Refer to Preparing to tow in this chapter e Stay within your vehicle s load limits e Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing Refer to Driving while you tow in this chapter e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on steep grades the A C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine from overheating This may result in a temporary increase of interior temperatures 238 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading For load specification terms found on the label refer to Vehicle loading with and without a trailer in this chapter Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight kg Weight Ib kg FWD 3 5L Class I 6710 3044 2000 907 AWD 3 5L Class II 8400 3811 3500 1588 WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment
166. chments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information 200 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the locator symbols on the seat back Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown WARNING Never attach two child s
167. ck Channel by pressing the OK button when the desired channel is selected Once a channel has been skipped or locked you can only access those channels by pressing Direct and entering in the channel number Locking or unlocking a channel also requires you to enter your PIN Set Category Select to scroll through a list of available SIRIUS channel categories Pop Rock News etc Note If you select a category the seek and scan functions will only stop on channels in that category Alerts Select this to create an alert for a particular song or artist or team The system will then alert you when it is playing on another channel From this screen you can also maintain alerts enable disable and delete alerts from your list You can save up to 20 alerts If you attempt to save an alert and your list is full the system will prompt you to delete one Unlock All Stations Select this and use your PIN to unlock all previously locked channels from the parental lock feature Skip No Stations Select this feature and use to unskip all channels you previously selected to skip Parental Lock PIN Select to create a PIN which will allow you to lock or unlock certain channels Note Your initial PIN is 1234 53 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Satellite radio information if activated SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio
168. cle is equipped with this feature it will be denoted by an M instead of an L located in the shift selector indicator Refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter When SST is activated the M will light up in the shift select indicator and also in the message center 33 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster The selected gear will be displayed at the bottom of the vertical bar tachometer if selected The selected gear will be displayed within the full analog tachometer if selected Trip 1 amp 2 Press the right arrow on the left steering wheel mounted button when trip 1 amp 2 is selected The boxes in the upper right corner of the screen indicate that there are multiple screens that you can navigate through Each press of the right arrow will navigate to the next screen until the last screen is reached The white highlighted box indicates which of the screens you are currently viewing Choose the standard or enhanced display See the Settings chart following to reach the trip display settings 34 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Standard trip display 00 58 44 01234 5mi e Trip distance shows the accumulated trip distance e Elapsed trip time timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted Enhanced trip display 28 5 MPG 300 5 GAL 00 58 44 01234 5
169. cle s perimeter alarm is in the armed state the smart unlock feature will not allow you to lock your IA key inside the vehicle When the alarm is armed if the TA key is detected in the vehicle the liftgate will automatically be released and the horn will chirp as a reminder that the TA key is inside If you would like to intentionally lock your TA key in your vehicle first disarm the perimeter alarm by unlocking the vehicle then place the TA key in the rear cargo area close the liftgate and rearm your perimeter alarm system by locking the vehicle using your keyless entry keypad or another IA key For more information on arming disarming of the perimeter alarm system refer to Perimeter alarm system in this chapter Autolock feature The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition on e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h Deactivating activating autolock feature Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock procedure e using a keypad procedure
170. clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set 325 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION For King Ranch leather seats refer to a separate section in this chapter Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors To check for compatibility first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended
171. completely latching the liftgate could result in damage to the liftgate and or its power components Make sure the liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle Care should be exercised in starting the engine before the liftgate is fully closed latched If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close cycle and the liftgate is 6 10 inches 15 24 cm from being latched the liftgate may reverse to the full open position Verify that the gate is closed before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure The liftgate or its components could be damaged in an enclosure if the liftgate is open while the vehicle is being operated When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32 F 0 C the liftgate may stop about 5 inches 12 7 cm from the full open position The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the maximum open position The power liftgate feature can be enabled or disabled using the message center controls With the setting turned off power operation is disabled from the liftgate handle button and from the rear cargo area button The transmitter and instrument panel switch will still continue to operate the liftgate regardless of the position state of the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter To power open or close the liftgate from the instrument panel Press the button located to the left of the stee
172. cted in the vehicle 6 Within one minute press the start stop button A message will be displayed on the message center indicating that the new intelligent access key was programmed If four intelligent access keys have already been programmed to your vehicle you cannot program anymore and the message MAX OF KEYS LEARNED will be displayed on the message center 7 Remove the intelligent access key from the center console pocket and press the P or A control on the newly programmed intelligent access keys to exit programming mode 8 Verify that the remote entry functions operate lock unlock and that the vehicle starts with new intelligent access key If the intelligent access key has been successfully programmed it can be used to activate the intelligent access with push button Start feature and can be used to start your vehicle Note To program MyKey features refer to MyKey in this chapter PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM The perimeter alarm system will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry When the following types of unauthorized entry occur e any door the hood or the liftgate trunk is opened without using the keypad or the remote entry transmitter 145 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e orif the ignition is turned on with an invalid key the perimeter alarm will flash the turn signal lamps and sound the horn ARMING THE SYSTEM The system is ready to arm when
173. ction maintenance I M replacing bulbs 82 TESTNE rami erir aleriakei cannes 355 LATCHanchols 200 Instrument panel Liftgate sn peusdeansane 112 118 118 134 cleaning sescsacevecevcstcdneerecevestconeue 324 o Lights warning and indicator 12 CISTET asan sa a e rl 12 anti lock brakes ABS 251 lighting up panel and Load limits 231 INCETION Yeis ea het 77 Lock ocks Intelligent Access Key 120 AULOLOCK eee 127 Intelligent Access with push GhildprO0l rae ealdmisi 130 p tton start sssrinin trr 132 GOOTS pieren 126 J Lubricant specifications 364 LUGS NUS rasim 306 dak eek a tn oes ene alen 300 Lumbar support seats 152 154 POSION crises 300 S OLA G s serrebisirkersies EAG 300 M J starti hicle 307 a e Message center 19 30 K warning messages 24 40 l e KK 93 94 Keyless entry system automatic dimming rearvieW hb Ko e e e ir Me 127 TUE OR resileri sararan nanie 94 keypad paserna 140 fold AWAY 95 locking and unlocking heated secsccvscerisvevecnsannnassthcerceeeds 95 COOLS ssi stead ee eee 141 programmable memory 134 programming entry code 140 side view mirrors power 94 Keys ka aoa 119 142 Moonrooi 107 positions of the ignition 249 Motorcraft parts 328 363 L MyFord syste
174. d brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal Do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance Brake assist The brake assist system provides full braking force during panic braking situations It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and uses the ABS system to achieve maximum braking pressure Once a panic brake 250 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving application is detected the system will remain activated as long as the brake pedal is pressed or ABS is engaged The system is deactivated by either releasing the brake pedal or coming to a complete stop When the system activates noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed this is normal ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains o
175. d gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if y
176. d on the steering wheel SET Press to set a speed or to RES change the set speed EM CNCE RES CNCL Resume cancel a Press to resume or cancel a set OFF speed v ON OFF Press to turn the system on or off GAP Press to change the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you 98 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Setting adaptive cruise control 1 Press and release ON The mm message center will display the gray amp x ACC indicator light current a gap setting and SET SET 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press SET upward and release The vehicle speed will be stored in the memory and the message center will display a green x ACC indicator light current gap setting and desired set speed 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 A lead vehicle graphic will cH illuminate if there is a vehicle detected in front of you Following a vehicle WARNING When following a vehicle in front of you the vehicle will not decelerate automatically to a stop nor will the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver intervention Always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in a collision serious injury or death When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to maintain a preset gap distance The distanc
177. d remove from lamp assembly 5 Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 7 Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the lamp assembly with two bolts Replacing high mount brake lamp bulbs Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high mount stop lamp It is designed to last the life of the vehicle If replacement is required see your authorized dealer 85 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position 2 Press the lever and carefully pry the license plate lamp assembly located above the license plate from the liftgate 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 4 Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb 5 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 6 To install carefully press the lamp assembly into the liftgate 86 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WINDSHIELD WIPERS Windshield wiper Rotate the end A of the control away from you to ayem increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Speed dependent wipers if equipped When the wiper control is set to any of the interval settings except the longest pause se
178. d the center console if equipped Objects hanging off the seat back Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket Gf equipped Objects placed on the occupant s lap Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag status indicator lamp for proper airbag status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system In case there is a problem with the e front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness light in the IN instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness light is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat 183 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing
179. d will continue to function during the cool down period The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC section below 254 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Electronic stability control ESC Electronic stability control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During ESC events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter The electronic stability control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC
180. damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint C 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 359 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Install a new air filter element B
181. deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disable enabled during the same key cycle The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition is off e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 175 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Turn the ignition on DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off approximately 1 2 minutes e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state e After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds
182. dow Defrost Demist E O Q gt DFO en E 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Payee WONS a Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage i Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm s Engine Oil TEA Engine Coolant Temperature E y m Engine Coolant Da DOPO Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Bi Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter DE Ni Compartment a Jack lt gt Check Fuel Cap Ri ri m 1 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Base instrument cluster with standard measure shown metric similar 5 4 l 6 NO RPMX1 000 fo BL 17 Optional instrument cluster with standard measure shown metric similar Warning lights can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause extensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions 12 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the indicators work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to
183. driver setting choices Press the right arrow key when in the Settings menu to reach the listed modes below Note Some items are optional and may not appear Driver Assist On default setting Off Blind Spot On default on key cycle Off Collision Warning Sensitivity High Normal Low Gf MyKey is programmed On default on key cycle Off On default on key cycle Off Cross Traffic On default on key cycle Off Alert Adaptive or Normal Rear Park Aid On default on key cycle Off On default on key cycle Off 37 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Vehicle Autolamp Delay Off 10 20 default setting 30 60 90 120 180 seconds Remote All doors Driver s door Standard Memory On Set to 10 100 Enable Disable Climate Control Heater A C Auto Last using this Settings feature allows you to select Auto Off different climate control modes Auto Off Remote Start when the vehicle Driver Seat Auto Off is started using the remote start Passenger Seat Auto Off feature Wipers 38 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster MyKey Create MyKey Press and hold OK to create MyKey Always On User Selectable Speed Warning Off 65 mph 105 km h 55 mph 89 km h 45 mph 72 km h Set to 80 MPH 130 km h Off On default setting Off Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear MyKeys
184. e 4 800 km lubricant change interval may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles refer to Maintenance product and specifications in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details The axle lubricant should be changed anytime an axle has been submerged in water Police Taxi Livery vehicle axle maintenance Replace rear axle lubricant every 100 000 miles 160 000 km Rear axle lubricant change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSLM2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 ml of friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle lubricant should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water California fuel filter replacement If vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this main tenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you fo have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified inter vals and to record all vehicle service Hot climate oil change interval
185. e handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 2011 Edge edg 235 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacemen
186. e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction control system TCS Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem engine traction control and brake traction control Engine traction control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake traction control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction control is most active at low speeds During traction control events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash If the traction control system is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation traction control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC are not affected by this condition an
187. e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of 24 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster e Some messages Will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing OK This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver door is not completely closed LIFTGATE AJAR Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter FUEL LEVEL LOW XXX KM TO E Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition FUEL LEVEL LOW XXX MI TO E Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake
188. e careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Periodically wash vehicles stored in expos
189. e child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat 181 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Passenger Airbag r Occupant Bene mdi tor Passenger Airbag r Lit Empty ONUNU Unlit Disabled a Lit Child ON PON at nit Disabled OFF Unit Uniit
190. e distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Q Vol Power Volume Press to turn the system on off and turn to increase decrease the volume levels Maneuvering the screens When using your system information will appear in the display screen You can make selections and maneuver the screens a few different ways 1 Use the soft keys beneath the screen to select the function directly above them 2 You can press some of the hard buttons to access their respective menus 48 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 Use the center control in the same manner you would a joystick press A IV to move up down in menus or press lt q b to move out of or into a menu When these options are available icons will appear on the screen 4 Press OK on the center control to make or confirm selections Note You can also use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to make the same selections you would with the center control Setting the Clock e Press CLOCK Ment 19 08 e Use the center controls to move of Set clock h
191. e for approximate zone coverage areas sensor obstructed for vehicle on left Backing slowly from the parking spot in these situations helps to increase the sensor coverage and effectiveness CTA coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles refer to figure for approximate zone coverage areas Sensor obstructed for vehicle on left IOP 278 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving CTA detection limitations Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zones may not be detected Below is a list of circumstances that may cause non detection e Debris build up on the rear guarter panel fascias e The rear quarter panel radar beams are obstructed or partially obstructed by an adjacently parked vehicle or object Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph 24 km h e Severe weather conditions e Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph 5 km h e Backing out of an angled parking spot CTA false alerts Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances when the BLIS will alert with no object present when backing up This is known as a false alert Some level of false alerts are normal Circumstances that may cause a false alert when backing up are backing out of a garage backing in to a parking space and objects very close to the sensor False alerts are temporary and
192. e fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of Regular unleaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary t
193. e park assist in the Driving chapter for more information CHECK PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the park aid is disabled CHECK REAR PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the park aid is disabled TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the driver s side door In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering the ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and security chapter TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED if equipped Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway For more information refer to the Driving chapter for more information TRANSPORT MODE CONTACT DEALER Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with informational messages and or warnings The message center is also used to program configure the different features of your vehicle The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Use the left steering wheel controls to navigate through the message center Use the right steering wheel controls to navigate through the infotainmen
194. e possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury 343 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS gi Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling 344 2011
195. e release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out To remove the fuse panel cover press in the tabs on both sides of the cover then pull the cover off To reinstall the fuse panel cover place the top part of the cover on the fuse panel then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into place Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure To reinstall the trim panel align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with the grooves push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to secure the panel To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover 292 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Ko Pol cof foo Je mM gt J8 CD D CD T3 36 4 25 Ni UUBBURRBE AE 3 ii BE The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Re e eme a ia e 1 30A Driver front smart window Zo a ne used Gere 3 BOA Notused pare gt 4 CA Demandlamps o 5 204 Notused spare Pp EO 5A RF module 7 5A Power mirror switch Memory seat Pf leech Deer seat ede a 8 10A Notused spare Not T spare 9 104 Power liftgate Rur accessory relay 11 10A Instrument panel cluster Heads up display 293 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 12 15A Interior lighting Puddle lamps High m
196. e roof panel For proper function of the roof rack system loads must be placed directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails Your vehicle may be equipped with factory installed crossbars Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle are also recommended for use with your roof rack system The vehicle s roof panel is NOT designed to directly carry a load The maximum recommended load is 100 Ib 45 kg evenly distributed on the crossbars Ensure that the load is securely fastened WARNING When loading the roof rail crossbars it is recommended to evenly distribute the load as well as maintain a low center of gravity Loaded vehicles with higher centers of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle When the rail system is loaded check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop 118 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS Integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters KTs The key blade functions as a programmed key which starts the vehicle and unlocks locks the driver s door The transmitter portion functions as the remote entry transmitter Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle using a non program
197. e sensing system RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 265 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to six feet two meters from the rear bumper with a decreased cov
198. e setting is adjustable refer to Setting the gap distance in this section The lead vehicle graphic will be illuminated The vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead until e The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view e The vehicle speed falls below 16 mph 26 km h e A new gap distance is set The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to maintain a safe distance between the vehicle in front The maximum 99 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls braking which is applied by the ACC system is limited and can be overridden by the driver applying the brakes If the ACC system predicts that its Seo A maximum braking level will not be sufficient an audible warning will 4 sound while the ACC continues to GC a brake This is accompanied by a heads up display a red warning bar illuminating on the windshield The driver should take immediate action Note The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system WARNING Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in a collision serious injury or death Setti
199. e size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and
200. e start system through the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 139 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock or unlock the doors without using a key 1 2 68 4 6 8 7 3 8 9 e recall memory seat power mirrors positions if equipped The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create up to three of your own 5 digit personal entry codes When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to memory feature To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 For memory recall feature enter the sixth digit 1 e 2 to store driver 1 settings or 3 e 4 to store driver 2 settings Note Pressing 5 e 6 7 e 8 or 9 e 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will lock
201. e was last turned off To help make the vehicle as comfortable as possible the engine idle can be increased during a remote start You can enable or disable engine idle increase by selecting Remote Start Quiet in the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems Note Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated The remote start system will not work if e The ignition is on e The alarm system is triggered e The feature has been disabled e The hood is not closed e Two remote vehicle starts have already been attempted within the last hour e The vehicle is not in P Park Starting the engine with remote start The remote start label on your transmitter details the engine starting procedure To start the engine using remote start Note Each button press must be done within three seconds of each other If this sequence is not followed the vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not chirp 138 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 1 Press A to lock all the doors 2 Press two times The exterior lamps will flash twice If
202. ecurity chapter for more information WAIT XZ MINUTES Displays time required before security access is granted to program keys CRUISE CONTROL AUTOMATIC BRAKING TURNED OFF if equipped Displayed when adaptive cruise control automatic braking is turned off ADAPTIVE CRUISE MALFUNCTION if equipped Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE if equipped Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL if equipped Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve FRONT SENSOR NOT ALIGNED if equipped Displayed when the adaptive cruise system detects the front sensor is not aligned correctly See your authorized dealer for service COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLECif equipped Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled COLLISION WARNING NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL if equipped Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of the radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve COLLISION WARNING MALFUNCTION if equipped Displayed when there is a sys
203. ed Displayed when hill descent speed exceeds 32 KM H FOR HILL DESCENT SHIFT INTO GEAR if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode requires driver shift transmission into gear FOR OFF ROAD SLOW TO 5 MPH if equipped Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement for off road mode entry has not been met DRIVER RESUME CONTROL if equipped Displayed when the hill control and off road mode require the driver to resume control HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode becomes active HILL DESCENT CONTROL FAULT if equipped Displayed when a hill descent system fault is present HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode becomes inactive HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF SYSTEM COOLING if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode is disabled to cool the brake system HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode is ready MODE CHANGE NOT ACCEPTED RETRY if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode cannot be changed at time of driver request ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE if equipped Displayed when the vehicle is in the accessory ignition state CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information
204. ed Deprogramming the memory feature from the transmitter To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 button for five seconds A tone will be heard after 142 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 2 Within three seconds press the m 3 Repeat this procedure for transmitter if desired Memory profiles The memory feature also coordinates with user created profile settings utilizing the infotainment touchscreen system if equipped See the Creating a user profile section in the MyFord Touch supplement for more information Replacing the battery The integrated keyhead transmitter IKT or intelligent access key JA key uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery Integrated keyhead transmitter IKT 1 Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key ring to remove the battery cover 1 Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board 2 Carefully peel up the rubber gasket 2 from the transmitter if it does not come off with battery cover 3 Remove the old battery 3 Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the b
205. ed they will turn off automatically when the engine is turned off The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been activated 161 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors e Drivers seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off on indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensors e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and backup tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Sa
206. ed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SHIFT TO PARK Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine with the shift select lever in any position other than P Park Refer to Fast restart feature in Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine Check the oil level See Checking the engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the warning stays on or c
207. ed by message center and perform services as listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently service as See axle maintenance items under Exceptions required Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Change manual transmission fluid Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified time mileage km period either within 3 000 miles 5 000 km of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or when the time mileage km reading indicates service is due Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28 751 miles 46 270 km perform the 30 000 mile 48 000 km automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30 000 miles 48 000 km perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25 000 miles 40 000 km 389 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Extensive idling and or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery As required Change engine oil and replace oil filter as indicated by message center and perform services as listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart except Fiesta Inspect frequently service as Replace
208. ed locations e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed See the Cleaning chapter for more information 360 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents Engine e The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 80 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add Motorcraft Gas Stabilizer or equivalent meeting Ford material specification ESE M99C112 A to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system
209. ed to have an electronic brake controller with associated wiring installed to your vehicle by an authorized dealer WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps Your vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and monitor your vehicle lamps Splicing into the wiring or attaching wiring to the vehicle bulb may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps or cause them not to function properly Your lamp outage feature may also be disabled or provide incorrect information 240 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Driving while you tow When towing a trailer Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing and don t make full throttle starts Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Use a lower gear to eliminate excessive shifting and assist in transmission cooling For additional information refer to Automatic t
210. ed vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the accessory position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches tt 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink bu
211. eft in the fuel tank The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade e Bar tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Round analog tachometer Fuel gauge 01234 5mi For descriptions of the tachometer and fuel gauge see the description listed previously 32 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Round analog tachometer Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge T 5 6 For descriptions of the tachometer AN 1000 and fuel gauge see the description R listed previously yi e Engine coolant temperature l G 0 gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the level indicator will be in the normal range If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool Intelligent all wheel drive AWD if equipped other gauges For a description of the other gauges see the descriptions listed previously 01234 5mi e Intelligent all wheel drive shows the AWD mode that the vehicle is in Refer to All Wheel Drive AWD system and Terrain management in the Driving chapter SelectShift Automatic transmission SST Select Shift transmission allows you to manually shift gears If your vehi
212. egarding two stage unlocking refer to the Unlocking the doors Two stage unlock section earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors enter the factory set code or your personal code then press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press and hold the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time with the driver s door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded integrated keyhead transmitter IKT or intelligent access keys programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition The message center will display STARTING SYSTEM FAULT 141 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Your vehicle comes with two coded integrated keyhead transmitters or intelligent access keys additional coded transmitters may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare transmitters to your vehicle or you can program then yourself Refer to Programming spare integrated keyhead transmitters or Programming spare intelligent access keys for instructions on how to program the coded key For integrated keyhead transmitter IKT the standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality c
213. ehicle Note A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight can be IKTs with remote entry functionality Tips e Only use integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs or standard SecuriLock keys e You must have two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible e If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition 2 Turn the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within ten seconds of turning the ignition off insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 143 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 5 Turn the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key
214. ehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 312 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized
215. el In order to operate the push button start system and start the vehicle your intelligent access key IA key must be present inside the vehicle Ignition modes 1 Off press and release the START STOP button without applying the brake pedal when your vehicle is in accessory or on modes or when the engine is running Note When the vehicle is in motion a single press and release of the START STOP button will not switch off the engine In order to switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion press and hold the START STOP button for at least one second 2 Accessory press and release the START STOP button without applying the brake pedal This allows electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE and PRESS BRAKE TO START will be displayed in the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information 3 On press and hold the START STOP button for at least one second without applying the brake pedal This will power your vehicle s electrical system and the warning lights in the instrument cluster will illuminate but the engine will remain off Note You can start the engine from any ignition mode 4 Start press the START STOP button for any length of time while applying the brake pedal Note The indicator light on the start button will illuminate when the vehicle is in on mode and when the engine is started
216. el 1 Level 2 or Level 3 the full area behind the vehicle will not be shown Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature WARNING Use caution when using the rear video camera and the liftgate is ajar If the liftgate is ajar the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect All guidelines if enabled have been removed when the liftgate is ajar WARNING Use caution when turning ON or OFF camera features while in R Reverse Make sure the vehicle is not moving If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation Night time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning 270 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear check if anything is covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized
217. ent and exhaust system which can start a fire 243 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine starts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set e Make sure the gearshift is in P Park 244 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving W Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights 3 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start Starting the engine Note If your vehicle is equipped with a push button start system
218. er feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature 172 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver s and front The Belt Minder feature will not passenger s safety belts are activate buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The drivers or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt is not the safety belt warning light buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime reached at least 3 mph sounds for six seconds every km h and 1 2 minutes have 30 seconds repeating for elapsed since the ignition approximately five minutes or until switch has been turned to on the safety belts are buckled The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime one minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every traveling at least 3 mph 30 seconds repeating for 5 km h and more than approximately five minutes or until 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the safety be
219. er s temperature to the desired value then touch and hold the MyTemp button for at least two seconds Any subsequent touch of the MyTemp button will automatically change to this set temperature for this user The preset temperature can be saved for each user via a personal computer and transferred to the vehicle via a USB device Refer to Creating a user profile in the Entertainment Systems chapter for more information Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather select G defrost or floor defrost To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with A recirculated air engaged and A C off e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected For maximum cooling performance MAX A C 1 Press MAX A C The system will default to single zone operation and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C 2 A C E and MV will be selected 3 Fan speed will be increased to the highest speed but can be adjusted as desired 68 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st
220. er in the number of the desired satellite radio channel Goo Goo Dolls and press Enter for quick access ME Replay Direct Info Select the Info soft key to view additional information about the current channel e Press 4 to seek to the previous next channel within the selected category 51 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e To save a channel as a preset acquire the desired channel and then press and hold the desired memory preset 0 9 A pop up screen will confirm when it is saved e To view your presets press A v fora list of your saved presets The display will indicate the preset that to which the station was saved e Select the Replay soft key to replay audio on the current channel You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current station If you change stations the previous audio will be erased While in replay mode you can e Press and release lt q PP to advance to the previous next song e Press and hold lt q PP to advance to reverse or fast forward in the current track e Press gt NI to play pause the audio e Select Exit amp Play Live to return to live audio if you had been using the replay feature to replay audio Audio settings To make adjustments to the sound settings press MENU gt Audio Settings to access e SCV Scroll to select Speed Compensated Volume S
221. er that the brake pedal must be applied when the start stop button is pressed in order to start the engine RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED if equipped Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 130 KM H Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information 44 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster STARTING SYSTEM FAULT This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting security system your vehicle will not be able to start See your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE AT TOP SPEED OF MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE NEAR MYKEY TOP SPEED Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and S
222. erage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 266 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The rear video camera syste
223. erns and or possible damage Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving The transmission fluid level should be targeted within the cross hatch area if at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 98 C High fluid level If the fluid level is above the MAX range of the dipstick remove fluid to reach the hashmark level Note 4 Fluid level above the MAX level may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter 358 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component
224. ers Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions
225. ers Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving the system has cooled down normal AWD function will return When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A G may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be reguired from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If t
226. ery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When 337 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must releam its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive a
227. es are on the floor in front of on or under the second row seat cushion before actuating the release lever to cycle the seats to the load floor position WARNING To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts ensure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to the load floor position 2nd row manual folding seat To fold down the rear seat pull up on the lever on the outboard side of the seat cushion and let the seatback rotate downward into the load floor position 2nd row EasyFold seatback release if equipped WARNING Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to the seat or injury Note The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and the liftgate has been open for less than 10 minutes The control buttons are located on the left hand rear quarter trim panel accessible from the liftgate area 158 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press and hold the control mechanism to lower the seatback The top portion lowers the right 40 seatback and the bottom portion lowers the left 60 seatback Returning the 2nd row seatback to the upright position WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original posit
228. etween the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy e Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy e Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving 352 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Maintenance e Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size e Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy e Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions e Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy e Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to d
229. ever the ignition is off To arm the system do one of the following e Press the A control on the remote entry transmitter Note If you press the control twice on the remote entry transmitter within three seconds the horn will chirp once to let you know that all doors the hood and the liftgate trunk are closed If any of these are not closed the horn will chirp twice to warn you that they are still open Press the driver or passenger interior door lock control A while the door is open then close the door Lock the doors using the intelligent access if equipped method press the lock area in either front door handle Press and hold the 7 e 8 and 9 e 0 controls together on the keyless entry pad to lock the doors driver s door must be closed After locking the doors using any of the methods above the turn signal lamps will flash once indicating that the perimeter alarm is in the pre armed mode and will become fully armed in 20 seconds Note Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second pre armed mode will disarm the system When fully armed after the 20 second pre arm mode any IA keys if equipped found inside the vehicle are disabled inoperable and will not start the engine Press button to re enable them 146 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Disarming the system To disarm the system do any of the following e Unlock the doors by pressing unlock 2 o
230. f advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The heated seats will only function when the engine is running 154 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To operate the heated seats Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights The heated seats will turn off after 15 minutes If the engine falls below 350 rpm while the heated seats are on the feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated Memory seats and power mirrors if eguipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat and power mirrors to two prog
231. fety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient 162 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints longitudinal deceleration The pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions and in rollovers and side collisions when the Safety Canopy is activated Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher
232. ffect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot G e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated 214 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires
233. for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 216 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or le
234. for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 373 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings e Spark plugs except California e Shock absorbers e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity 374 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan UVYIN I diz JIVIS ALIO
235. for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION ONLY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top grain leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather 326 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution e Clean spills as quickly as possible e Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather e Do not spill coffee ketchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of
236. ft until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford
237. fter initial change change engine coolant every 3 years or 50 000 miles 80 000 km Check every month Check function of all interior and exterior lights Check tires for wear and correct air pressure including spare tire Check windshield washer fluid level Check engine oil level Check every six months eck lap shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function eck parking brake for proper operation eck safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag safety belt for operation eck cooling system fluid level and coolant strength eck battery connections and clean if necessary eck washer spray wiper operation and clean all wiper blades replace as necessary eck and lubricate all hinges latches and outside locks Inspect for correct operation eck and lubricate door rubber weatherstrips Inspect for excessive wear eck and clean body and door drain holes Inspect for clogs and obstructions mE mimi mi mimi mimm Multi point inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help ensure your vehicle keeps running great 380 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Multi point inspection Recommended at every vi
238. fus Driving AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Automatic transmission adaptive learning Your transmission is eguipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in the vehicle computer This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6 speed automatic transmission Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and
239. g and that you comply with all applicable laws EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Child Seat Tether Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System Master Lighting Switch Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost Demist 10 AN A xe il a O CA See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Win
240. g capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation press
241. gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer ENGINE Engines are more eff
242. guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle 204 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow t
243. gumu Yed p1O0J oweu j1Ved ploy Aytloedey w lt Ne SAILIOVdVO ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONGOYd AONVNALNIVIN p ny oyeg Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Edge edg USA fus Maintenance and Specifications V L6TOCIWdSM TO 0O6MO8 AX AT eNOO9HAN ATO OLX A eNOO9YAN WD S LX V GSALON SSM Cepeue9 V 01 949 SM EV OTDA JIEN Uone IdV UM V 0EGICW SSM epeuep GISATOGME OX0 epeuey GI dS T OGMS OX0 SM SA 0ZMS OX e SM dS 02MS 0Xe uoneIyn ds prog Jequinu j1ed p10 YUBOUGuJ XY Ivey umud 06 M08 AVS e JED1O0JON pllV AT eNOOUdN Yesd10 0 ALV A oNODYYAN e 21210JON pedofoo useIs yep quejoog susug uay JeT dS g1J219107ONN epeueg TO 104019 ONey WAS OGMG AVS YE41010N e epeueg TO AOJOW WMNtWetg 19dng OGM HVS HEL10J0NN e sf TO 10101 ONAYYUA ma OG MG AVS e YE4910Y0N e SM TO 1090W puojd oneyyudg wnpuoIdq 0G MS AVS oye NW IST squid pg e 19 01 syenb TTT IIOAJ9S91 UO XVI pue NIW U99M19g CIUT syrenb J TT 12g syzenb gg pmy AMV Tenuolojj p 109Yy pm UOISSIUISURI OEMOMV pm 8UL1991S 19M0g YueJ009 OUTBUN WO SUSUN 365 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Edge edg USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CTE TT send 6 TT eseyord Mo Tojre1 YILM JURTOOD suTsUT Area ABUL suotyeoydde swog Ajoedeo qy Arp eyeurrxoidde Auo soeyeotpu y BUT 10 SUNYI eae PMY 107 Jafeap pozuoy ne MOA 395 aseulep UOTSSTUISULIJ SNVLI
244. hades are completely open Power sunshades will only close after Vista Roof is completely closed To open the panoramic Vista Roof press and release the ats control The panoramic Vista Roof will open to the comfort position Press and release the control again to fully open To stop the one touch open feature press the control again 107 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Note The comfort position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened To close the panoramic Vista Roof M and power sunshades Pull the ais control down and release The glass panel will stop at the express close position Firmly pull the control again and hold to fully close the Vista Roof Pull the control down and release to close the sunshades to the express close position Firmly pull the control again and hold to fully close the front and rear sunshades To vent the panoramic Vista Roof From the closed position press and release the TILT control l To close pull and hold the TILT control down Note If the panoramic Vista Roof is excessively operated the glass and shade motors will automatically go into a fail safe jog mode manual intermittent operation to prevent overheating and or damage to the motor The motors will revert back to normal operation after a period of idle time U
245. hains on dry roads 230 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 231 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum paylo
246. he toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 86 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 205 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may pla
247. he event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver door is not completely closed 40 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster LIFTGATE AJAR Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter FUEL LEVEL LOW XXX MI TO E Display
248. he exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off Rear window wiper washer controls For rear wiper operation rotate the rear window wiper and washer control to the desired position Select 2 Intermittent operation shortest pause between wipes 1 Intermittent operation longest pause between wipes O off Rear wiper and washer off For rear wash cycle rotate and hold as desired the rear wiper washer control to either CJ position 88 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls From either position the control will automatically return to the 2 or O off position Reverse wiper feature The rear wiper will be automatically activated in an intermittent setting when shifting into R Reverse if the front wipers are activated This feature may be enabled disabled through the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter TILT TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull the lever down to unlock the steering column 2 While the lever is in the down position move the steering wheel up or down and in or out until you find the desired position 3 While holding the steering wheel in place pull the lever up to its original position to lock the steering column WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPP
249. he vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and PTU power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land 285 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive
250. heel drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram LL ZZ ff i LT EE ee KEST Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be eguipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 220 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tir
251. hile it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Easy Fuel no cap fuel system Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel no cap fuel filler system This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system The Easy Fuel system is self sealing and protected against dust dirt water and snow ice When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping Pump fuel as normal 346 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 After you are done pumping fuel wait about five seconds before slowly removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within the fuel filler housing and to the ground If the check fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message comes on the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed
252. hime when the distance to empty value reaches 75 miles 120 km If equipped any of the following parking aid Blind Spot Information System BLIS with cross traffic alert and forward collision warning systems cannot be turned off Optional settings these settings can be changed e Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph 130 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached 80 mph 130 km h e Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected vehicle speed of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h is exceeded e The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45 MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the audio system display when attempting to exceed the limited volume e The AdvanceTrac system cannot be turned off When this optional setting is on the MyKey user will not be able to deactivate the system Note It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac system if the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand Create a MyKey To program MyKey on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle insert the key that you want to make a MyKey into the ignition For vehicles equipped with push button start put the intelligent access key in the backup slot with brand logo facing up see the Driving chapter for the location of the backup slot Turn the ignition on Use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Get into main menu select SETTING
253. his chapter Note At least two already programmed transmitters are required to perform this procedure yourself Illuminated entry The interior lamps parking lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate when the integrated keyhead transmitter intelligent access keys or the keyless entry system keypad is used to unlock the door s 136 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if e the ignition is turned on or e the A control on the transmitter is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad or e after 25 seconds of illumination The lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open Illuminated exit When all vehicle doors are closed the ignition is turned off and the key is removed from the ignition IKT only the interior dome lamps parking lamps and the puddle lamps if equipped will illuminate The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse or e the key is inserted in the ignition IKT only or Gf equipped with intelligent access with push button start feature the start button is pressed Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off e If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes af
254. hock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description Location Rating o gt lt RE ZI NN GE Noted S i 0 Anti lock brake system ABS pump Se SN MENA Power liftgate Power point 2 console rear o Netused Oo nuno Rear window defroster heated mirror relay 296 8 20a Moon roof 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description m Not Not used Se gt o 4 Notus S 15 Pel pump relay Ntwse OX N amp wse 2 Ntwse 2d Notus 2 Notus 2 20A Front power pointflighter 28 30A Climate controlled seats E O m 8 Ntwsed 3 Newse lt 0 e Netwse 8 N
255. horized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Note A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your vehicle If you would like to replace a previously programmed access key with a new access key or if you already have four access keys programmed to your vehicle you must take your vehicle and all access keys to your authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed Ensure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure Ensure that all doors are closed before beginning this procedure and that all 144 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security doors remain closed throughout the procedure Perform this procedure exactly as described below and perform all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence If any steps are performed out of sequence stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Place the new unprogrammed intelligent access key in the pocket inside of the center console 2 Press the driver or passenger power door unlock control three times 3 Press and release the brake pedal one time 4 Press the driver or passenger power door lock control three times 5 Press and release the brake pedal one time The indicator on the Start Stop button should begin to rapidly flash indicating that programming mode has been entered and two programmed intelligent access keys have been dete
256. ht of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 234 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus e Example only WARNING Tires Wheels and Loading MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG REAR GAWR XXXXLI XXXXKG XXXX XXXXXXX DATE XX XX FRONT GAWR XXXXL XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX AT XXX KPa XX PSLCOLD 4f ATZXXX KPaXX THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MO VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WETBRK TINTTR TPPS R TAXLE TR SPR TXXXXX XXX X XX X X XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX_ XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX WITH TIRES RIMS PSI COLD OR XXXXX MFD BY F FORD MC MOTOR C0 GYW XXXX LB OXXKG FRONT nib M7 a GAWR vg AR XXX AVEC T RES PNEUS POX DATE xx xx CARD A A Rese XXXX XXXXXX RIMS JANTES XXxXXX AT A kPa PSI LPC xxx xx VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIES 000 00 ox ROK unc ed COLD A FROID xxx xx JUMELEES yi TT TR TANE R SPR X Xx O 0000000000000 XXX VXXXX00000X XX Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicl
257. ice may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire wheel cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire pressure warning lamp will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be infl
258. icient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components 322 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine 3 5L V6 engine shown 3 7L engine similar e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the
259. ickly and reduce fuel economy Note If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake applied a chime will sound ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction control system TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction e Electronic stability control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides e Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death 252 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
260. icle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty For AWD vehicles a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sized between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD vehicles Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Crossover vehicles can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces As a result of the above dimensional differences crossover vehicles often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that ma
261. if equipped or e or by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 127 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Tum the ignition off 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Tum the ignition back on The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition off The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad autolock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4
262. ifficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives 321 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will
263. ifications If reguired add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine oil in this chapter with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine damage If the engine is xX e G overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated e Do not overfill the engine Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until it stops To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark 335 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to
264. in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turnaround because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control 286 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Avoid sudden applicat
265. indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 351 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Follow one of the
266. ine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir COLD FILL RANGE e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL or MIN MAX range as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level
267. inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 221 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not reguired by federal law Po Qf 9 mH EI Why PR 106 mph ATL rh pO 186 mph 299 rv Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the nu
268. io account The ESN is found on the System Information Screen SR ESN XXXXXXXXXXXX To access your ESN press MENU gt SIRIUS gt Show ESN or tune to channel 0 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes 54 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Troubleshooting tips Radio Display Possible action Acguiring Radio reguires more No action reguired This than two seconds to message should disappear produce audio for the shortly selected channel SIRIUS system Internal module or If this message does not failure system failure clear within shortly or present with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel Channel no longer Tune to another channel available or choose another preset Unsubscribed Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at Channel available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel No Signal Loss of signal from The signal is currently the SIRIUS satellite being blocked When you or SIRIUS tower to move into an open area the vehicle antenna the signal should return Updating Update of channel No
269. ion e Vehicle has been started using a non Ford approved remote start system as an admin key then a MyKey is inserted without restarting the engine MyKey e Unknown key has been programmed to the programmed vehicle as a MyKey total includes e Vehicle is equipped with a non Ford approved one additional remote start system Refer to Using MyKey with key remote start systems section Admin keys e Unknown key has been programmed to the programmed vehicle as admin key total includes e Vehicle is equipped with a non Ford approved one additional remote start system Refer to Using MyKey with key remote start systems section MyKey e MyKey is not being used by the intended user distance does not e MyKey system has been recently cleared accumulate e Vehicles has been remote started using a non Ford approved remote start system as if an admin key then a MyKey is inserted without recycling the MyKey in ignition 125 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security POWER DOOR LOCKS e Pressthe 2 control to unlock all doors e Pressthe 6 control to lock all doors Smart unlocks for integrated keyhead transmitter IKT This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the power door lock control on the driver or passenger
270. ion pull on the seatback to ensure that the latches are engaged An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright position The seatback will click when it is locked into position Adjusting the second row seatback WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision The second row seat reclines for eee additional comfort To adjust the second row seatback to the desired ee position while seated pull the release lever up and push the seatback rearward 159 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Seat mounted armrest and cupholders Your vehicle is eguipped with a rear seat armrest To fold the armrest down release the latch located on the seatback by pressing down and pulling forward l To access the cup holders lift up one of the slotted areas on the la WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision Returning the 2nd row armrest to the upright position Close the cover on the cup holders Rotate the armrest rearward until the armrest is in the latched position The armrest will click when it is latched into position 160 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide
271. ion to lock mirrors in place Memory mirrors if equipped The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory set and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door Refer to Front seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 94 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Heated outside mirrors X if equipped Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated J Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Fold away mirrors Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash gt gt Blind spot mirrors if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with blind spot mirrors or a blind spot information system Refer to Blind spot mirrors or Blind spot information system BLIS with cross traffic alert CTA in the Driving chapter SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerat
272. ions of power and guick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti lock brake system ABS do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle Maintenance and modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and dur
273. is dispute handling procedure is not reguired prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of mo
274. ise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except Fiesta and vehicles equipped with a 6R80 transmission Every 50 000 miles 80 000 km Change manual transmission fluid Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter Exclusive use of E85 Flex Fuel Vehicles only Every oil change interval f ran exclusively on E85 fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel 391 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Special operating condition log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace 392 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp
275. itions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The transmitter allows you to e remotely unlock the vehicle doors 2 e remotely lock all the vehicle doors ej N e remotely open the power liftgate if equipped amp 5 e remotely start the vehicle if equipped e activate the personal alarm e arm and disarm the perimeter anti theft system e operate the illuminated entry feature e activate the global opening windows feature Refer to Intelligent access in this section for more features The remote entry lock unlock feature operates in any ignition position except while the vehicle is in the start position The panic feature operates with the ignition off If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL integrated keyhead transmitters or intelligent access keys with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem 131 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Intelligent access if equipped WARNING Radio waves from the intelligent access system transmitters in the vehicle may affect certain implanted medical devices such as pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators People having such implanted medical devices should ask the medical device manufacturer or their physician whether the intelligent access system may affect the equipment before coming into close proximi
276. iver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips Lift handle to move seat forward or backward Pump the handle upwards to raise the cushion and pump downward to lower the cushion to the desired location 151 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Pull lever up to adjust seatback Using the manual lumbar support if equipped The lumbar control is located on the side of the seat cushion Rachet the lever up or down to adjust lumbar support yg r pi A WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving Adjusting the front power seat if equipped f WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop A WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 152 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system res
277. ke your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car 210 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The
278. king brake on chime Sounds when the parking brake is left on and the vehicle is driven If the warning stays on after the park brake is off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 17 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster GAUGES Base cluster shown in standard measure metric similar O a 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine 2 Multifunction display This displays the engine coolant temperature odometer and trip meter This is also used to configure different vehicle personalization options and display the status of various vehicle functions and vehicle status information See Base message center in this chapter for more information e Engine coolant temperature gauge if enabled Indicates H engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature EF the level indicator will be in the normal range If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the C normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let then engine cool The engine coolant temperature gauge can be enabled or disabled See Base message center in this chapter for information on changing the display settings 18 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 3 Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle
279. l airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential 4 DUAL Press to activate dual zone separate passenger temperature control Press again to deactivate and return to single zone temperature control where the driver settings control the temperature for the entire vehicle 5 Passenger temperature control Press to activate dual zone temperature and to increase or decrease the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle 6 Fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed 7 Driver temperature control Press to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle If the passenger temperature controls are not activated dual zone the driver s settings will determine the temperature setting for the entire vehicle cabin 8 Q Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle through the vents 9 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow distribution A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 65 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 10 G Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear defroster This button will also
280. l change as indicated by the instrument cluster message center The message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil change is needed The engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or 500 miles 800 km after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message is displayed Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or 10 000 miles 16 000 km Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5 000 miles 8 000 km from your last oil change 383 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Joydeyo 490 MEWNAISUT I 0 19791 oBueyO JOY PUL lO SULU Y JOYE yy JONUON OTT TO JUosTTOW MOL JOSY 197199 V8essour 19 S1p9 JUSUMIASUT IY Aq payeoIpuT se pojetdurod oq PMOUS SEAU 9014195 OBULY TOs RA BE KEK rar rr p ddmb jt 1944 are urge9 yoodsuy ssuljy aseeis yg m p ddmb Jr IPNI SJurol PUL yeysealip spus pol a1 uotsuadsns squtof reg aseyuly 3UL1991S 799dSUJ peddmbe jl sjooq 7Jeys J1ey 199dsuJ Spfalys yeay pue uloysAs ysneyx 499dSuf pue Y13U91 S 10J weaisks Suood sugu ayelq Sued pue sosoy SBUTUTJ ayerq SUMIP S10701 saoys sped ayerq joodsuy t syugug mba JO 19J89p yNsuod Yonsd
281. l is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service engine soon tc indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter Refilling with a portable fuel container With the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others 349 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 1 After lifting the trunk cargo cover locate the white plastic funnel It is attached to the rear lower edge of the spare tire compartment 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly
282. l maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability 282 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Under severe operating conditions the A G may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gea
283. l still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature e The engine will completely shut down e Steering and braking effort will increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase th
284. laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 223 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are a 3 described below 0211447707 Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a tot
285. lb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other For vehicles with halogen headlamps On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line the headlamp will need to be adjusted For vehicles with HID headlamps There is a distinct cut off change from light to dark in the left portion of the beam pattern The top edge of this cut off should be positioned two inches 5 cm below the horizontal reference line 78 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 4 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 5 Close the hood and turn off the lamps HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE TURN SIGNAL CONTROL The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or downward position when acti
286. le 202 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The rear seats of your vehicle are eguipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under the second row seat gap cover marked with tether anchor symbols shown with title The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view 8 7 WARNING Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor A WARNING Do not use seat anchors as cargo tie downs Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether anchor 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap o
287. ligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 289 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at www ford ca for information on Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for guick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursement information U S
288. lity materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of eguivalent guality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 328 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants
289. lt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in rollover and side collisions when the Safety Canopy is activated This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management feature front outboard section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required 164 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Restraints Control Module RCM
290. lts often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH 174 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s airbag system One time disable If at any time the driver front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position the Belt Minder is disabled for the current ignition cycle The Belt Minder feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
291. lts are buckled the ignition switch has been turned to on 173 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts AL statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If uncomfortable you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t Safety belts when used properly reduce risk work of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my Possibly but a serious crash can do much more clothes than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with Set the example teen deaths occur 4 times more don t wear be
292. lugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations e On the passenger side of the center console near the instrument panel e In the center console storage compartment e On the rear side of the center console accessible from the rear seats e On the left rear quarter panel accessible from the liftgate or behind the rear seat Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses 91 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is reguired to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is p
293. m 48 58 MY KEY aksam sm sam si 120 Lamps autolamp system 75 o bulb replacement specifications chart 8l Ocanertin 348 daytime running light 76 i i a eee ie se eee 75 Oil see Engine oil 333 headlamps flash to pass 76 Overdrive 260 400 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus P Parental MyKey PYOSTAMMING 120 Parking Drake sin 251 Parts see Motorcraft parts 363 Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 163 Power distribution box See FUSES sidir imdikekde 295 Power door locks 126 Power liftgate 113 Power MITYOrS 94 Powerpoint 91 Power steering ssl 258 fluid checking and adding 356 fluid refill capacity 364 fluid specifications 364 Power Windows 92 Push button start system 246 R Rear view camera system 267 Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for CHIOT e 194 Relays smmm 291 Remote entry system 131 132 illuminated entry 136 137 locking unlocking doors 133 opening thetrunk 134 Remote start
294. m located on the liftgate above the a license plate provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the driver while reversing or reverse parking the vehicle To use the rear video camera system place the transmission in R Reverse An image will display on the touchscreen display The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road condition The rear video camera includes the following features that will assist the driver in reverse driving Fixed guidelines The fixed guidelines assist a driver with backing into a parking space or aligning with an object behind the vehicle To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is not in R Reverse do the following on the touchscreen 1 Select Menu 2 Select Vehicle 3 Select Rear View Camera The fixed guideline options are FIXED and OFF To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is in R Reverse select Menu The guideline options are the same as above e 1 Rear bumper e 2 Red zone 40 e 3 Yellow zone fi NG e 4 Green zone e 5 Center line of vehicle Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone 2 are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone 4 are further away 267 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone 4 to the yello
295. mber of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 222 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
296. med key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose one or both of your IKTs replacements are available through your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section later in this chapter Note Your vehicle s IKTs were issued with a security label that provides important vehicle key cut laa e FAM for future reference XEVA GSAOWSH 38 OL NOLLNWO XINO HAWOLSND AH 119 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Intelligent Access Key IA key if equipped Your vehicle may be eguipped with two intelligent access keys which operate the power locks and the remote entry system You have to have the IA key in the vehicle to activate the push button start system The TA key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that can be used to unlock the driver door To release the mechanical key blade slide the release on the back of the transmitter and pull the blade out Your IA keys are programmed to your vehicle You cannot enter or start your vehicle with an unprogrammed key If you lose one or both of your IA keys replacements are available from your authorized dealer For m
297. mi e Trip distance shows the accumulated trip distance e Average fuel economy shows the average fuel economy for a given trip e Estimated amount of fuel consumed shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip e Elapsed trip time timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted Press OK to pause the Trip 1 or 2 screen Press again to un pause Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information 35 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Fuel Economy Press the right arrow on the left steering wheel mounted button when fuel economy is selected The boxes in the upper right corner of the screen indicate that there are multiple screens that you can navigate through Kach press of the right arrow will navigate to the next screen until the last screen is reached The white highlighted box indicates which of the screens you are currently viewing Instant fuel economy Shown with vertical bar tachometer enabled C7 Avg 27 0 MPG e This display shows a visual graph 0 20 of your instantaneous fuel Pi i economy Press the right arrow to reach the other fuel displays and i 332 mi to E press the left arrow once to return to the previous display 01234 5mi Configurable fuel history Shown with vertical bar tachometer enabled Avg 27 0MPG 40 e This display shows a bar chart of WN lip f your fuel history configurable
298. mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 218 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire
299. n only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the driver applies the vehicle s brakes The brake pedal must be pressed just like for any typical braking situation Blocked sensor If a message regarding a blocked sensor is displayed the radar signals from the sensor located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille have been obstructed When the radar signals are obstructed a vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the collision warning system will not function The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed Action The surface of the radar in Clean the grille surface in front of the the grille is dirty or radar or remove the object causing the obstructed in some way obstruction The surface of the radar in Wait a short time It may take several the grille is clean but the minutes for the radar to detect that it is message remains in the no longer obstructed display Heavy rain spray snow or The collision warning system is fog is interfering with the temporarily disabled Collision warning radar signals should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve Swirling water or snow or The collision warning system is ice on the surface of the temporarily disabled Collision warning road may interfere with the should automatically reactivate a short radar signals time after the weather conditions impr
300. n increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http Avww nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 192 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Recommended Child size height weight or age Infants Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less Use a child safety or tod generally age four or younger seat sometimes
301. n or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 215 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn TR down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm YY When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls
302. n or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned on until the parking brake is released WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave the vehicle For vehicles with the push button start system remove the IA key whenever you leave the vehicle 251 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected Press the parking brake pedal downward again to release the parking brake Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out qu
303. n the Roadside Emergencies chapter 258 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry off and remove the BSI access panel 3 Locate the brake shift interlock lever in front of the shifter assembly 4 Apply the brake pedal Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutral position 5 Install the trim panel 6 Apply the brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 259 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
304. n the accelerator is released the ACC function will operate again and vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle Changing the set speed There are three ways to change the set speed e Accelerate or brake to the desired speed and press SET upward and release e Increase or decrease the speed by holding SET upward or downward until the desired set speed is shown on the message center The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed e Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph 2 km h by briefly pressing the SET upward or downward The ACC may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new set speed The set speed will display continuously in the message center while ACC is active Resuming the set speed Press and release RES CNCL This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed The set speed will display continuously in the message center while ACC is active Note Resume should only be used if the driver is aware of the set speed and intends to return to it Low speed automatic cancellation ACC is not functional at vehicle speeds below 16 mph 26 km h Once the vehicle speed drops below 16 mph 26 km h an audible alarm will sound and the automatic braking will be released 101 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Hilly condition usage It is recommended that the driver select a l
305. n the remote entry transmitter Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad e Enter the vehicle using intelligent access if equipped e Turn the ignition on with a valid key if equipped with IKT only e Press the panic control I on the remote entry transmitter The alarm system will still be armed but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding Unlock the doors using a key If you use this method the system will not disarm but you will have an opportunity to disarm the vehicle once entered See the Note following Note If the driver s door is unlocked with a key a chime will sound when you open the door and the message center will display TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE When this occurs you will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm using any of the actions above otherwise the alarm will trigger Perimeter alarm issues If there seems to be a potential perimeter alarm system problem with your vehicle ensure ALL keys remote entry transmitters are brought to your authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting 147 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints FRONT SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Befo
306. ncreased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon C indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position 355 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon y indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon O indicator
307. nd allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner S Follow your local authorized YY A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water 338 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding eng
308. nd tongue load and reduce speed to a safe level while towing If trailer sway is experienced SLOW DOWN During trailer sway control events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash momentarily The message center will also display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED In some cases when trailer sway is detected the vehicle speed is too high and may be at or above a speed at which trailer sway will grow continuously This may cause the system to activate multiple times and you may experience a slight deceleration of the vehicle Disabling trailer sway control Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Note that even if it was disabled before turning off the vehicle trailer sway control will be re enabled at each new key cycle WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental e g hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation 257 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the
309. ned that you have not downshifted in time It will still allow you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the engine will not be damaged from over revving Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting 263 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Hill start assist HSA system The hill start assist system makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake When hill start assist is active the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for up to three seconds after you release the brake pedal During this time you have time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal and pull away The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope for example from a car park ramp traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space WARNING The hill start assist system does not replace the parking brake When you leave the vehicle always apply the parking brake and select first or reverse gear Using hill start assist Hill start assist is activated automatically when the vehicle is stopped on a slope greater than five degrees Hill start assist operates with the vehicle facing downhill if reverse gear is selected WARNING You must remain in the vehicle once y
310. nents possibly causing a fire Powertrain malfunction reduced power RTT Illuminates when a A powertrain or an AWD fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 13 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning C P light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE ignition is turned on when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned on If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays ill
311. ners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats and safety belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot
312. ng 307 checking and adding 338 running out of fuel 307 349 a gili ea 341 364 Emission control system 353 SPCCHICATIONS seasg 364 m eer Cross Trac Alert amam a75 Cleaning 32 Cruise control COOLANT sireni aes 338 see Speed control 95 fail safe cooling 342 398 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus idle speedcontrol 336 lubrication specifications 364 refill capacities 364 service points 331 332 Engine block heater 248 Enginecil 333 checking and adding 333 GIP STICK cad cxeesslacs cade rak sinsi 333 filter specifications 335 363 recommendations 335 refillcapacities 364 specifications 364 Event data recording 7 Exhaust fumes 248 F Fail safe cooling 342 Fleet MyKey programming 120 Floor MAUS elsi anal 112 Fluid capacities 364 Four Wheel Drive vehicles drivingoffroad 282 b e ee Sk EA 344 calculating fuel economy 350 CAD e PA ME 346 Capacity anaya 364 choosing the right fuel 348 detergentinfuel 349 filler funnel
313. ng temperatures are reached to allow the fluid to cool before checking Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer WARNING The dipstick cap and surrounding components may be hot gloves are recommended 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 357 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by turning it to the locked position 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal operating temperature Low fluid level If the fluid level is below the MIN range of the dipstick add fluid to reach the hash mark level Note If the fluid level is below the MIN level do not drive the vehicle An underfill condition may cause shift and or engagement conc
314. ng the gap distance The distance between your vehicle eI and the vehicle in front of you can be decreased or increased by pressing the GAP control up or down The selected gap will be displayed in the message center as shown by the bars in the graphic Four gap distance settings are available Graphic Following Following Dynamic display bars distance distance at behavior between 60 mph vehicles 96 km h 1 second Sporty Normal Normal Comfort Each time the vehicle is restarted the last chosen gap for the current driver will be automatically selected Note It is the driver s responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions 100 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Disengaging adaptive cruise control Press the brake pedal or press CNCL to disengage the adaptive cruise control The last set speed will be displayed with a strikethrough Disengaging the adaptive cruise control will not erase your previous set speed Overriding adaptive cruise control WARNING Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by pressing the accelerator pedal the ACC will not automatically apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead The set speed and gap distance can be overridden by pressing the accelerator pedal When the driver is overriding ACC the green ACC light is illuminated and the follow vehicle is not displayed in the message center Whe
315. nning to operate the rear window defroster Press RG to turn the rear window defroster on An indicator light on the button will illuminate when active The rear window defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined amount of time if a low battery condition is detected or when the ignition is turned to the off or accessory position To manually turn off the rear window defroster at any time press the control again 72 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls If your vehicle is eguipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors the same button will activate both Refer to Heated outside mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED The climate control system will condition the cabin temperature during remote start Engine idle may increase to help with adjusting the cabin temperature Note No climate control adjustments will be recognized during remote start operation Once the ignition is cycled to the on position the climate control system will return to the previous settings last ignition on cycle and adjustments can be made normally If the previous setting was off the climate control system will turn off Automati
316. ns To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot y be erased e Press and hold the two outer O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds V HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section 111 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT WARNING Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the brake pedals Position the floor mat so that the A eyelet is over the pointed end of the lt 5 retention post and rotate forward to lock in Make sure that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure MANUAL LIFTGATE IF EQUIPP
317. nt statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back 163 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front passenger airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from frontal airbag deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty and the safety belt is unbuckled Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety be
318. ny engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and distilled water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly 340 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise le
319. o add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved 348 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal With keyless ignition just start the engine Crank time will be longer than usual Normally adding 1 gallon 8 8L of fue
320. of and power sunshade controls are located on the overhead console WARNING Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves WARNING When closing the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade opening Note Do not attempt to move the panoramic power sunshades manually or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur The sunshade track clips are designed to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent damage to the system If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function See your authorized dealer for proper panoramic Vista Roof or sunshade operating diagnostic or repair instructions Note The same ais control operates both the sunshades and the panoramic Vista Roof The panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade are equipped with an automatic one touch express opening feature To stop motion at any time during the one touch operation press the control a second time To open power sunshades and panoramic Vista Roof Press and release the gig control to l open the sunshade The front and rear sunshades open simultaneously Note Vista Roof will only open after power suns
321. of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 310 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed eguipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On FWD vehicles if your vehicle is to be towed from the front ensure proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this fashion If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment it is recommended that the front wheels drive wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transmission On AWD vehicles it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to prevent damage to the automatic transmission AWD system or vehicle 311 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies If the v
322. of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office 317 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands
323. og and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection To return to full automatic control press AUTO 10 Manual controls Select any of the following to determine where airflow is directed o Tai Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging To return to full automatic control press AUTO e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents To return to full automatic control press AUTO e H Distributes air through the instrument panel vents demister vents floor vents rear seat floor vents To return to full automatic control press AUTO e Distributes air through the demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents To return to full automatic control press AUTO 11 Driver settings e Press the red arrow to increase the temperature and press the blue arrow to decrease the temperature e Press gi to control the heated seat if eguipped Refer to Heated seats in the Seat and Safety Restrainis chapter e Pressand hold MyTemp to select a temperature you would like the vehicle to remember and maintain for you Climate control voice commands if eguipped The following voice commands are available at the main menu level of a voice session For example press m and af
324. ogramming During programming your hand held transmitter may tt automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency 110 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal e Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button A Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate O O operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink butto
325. on NHTSA provides education and training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http Www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 Chttp www tc gc ca 195 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety
326. on with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical 378 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Genuine Ford parts and service When planning your maintenance services consider your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your vehicle s needs Get the most from your service and maintenance visits There are a lot of reasons why visiting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient How s that for quality service Factory trained technicians Ford and Lincoln Mercury service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft branded replacement parts These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications and we stand behind them Parts installed at your Ford or
327. once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 199 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted atta
328. ontinues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 41 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less ENGINE COOLANT OVER TEMP Displayed when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT The power steering system has disabled
329. or a second double press of the transmitter button To manually operate the liftgate 1 Disable the liftgate power function Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 2 Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate Refer to Manual liftgate in this chapter Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested 115 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Obstacle detection The power liftgate system is eguipped with an obstacle detection feature If the power liftgate is closing the system will reverse to full open when it detects an obstacle A chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected as the liftgate begins to reopen Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can be closed under power If the power liftgate is opening the system will stop and a chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can again be operated normally Resetting the power liftgate The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if any of these conditions occur e a low voltage or dead battery e disconnected battery e the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar Cunlatched To reset the power liftgate 1 Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then reconnect the battery 2 Manually close and fully latch the liftgate
330. or a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR P265 40R22 LOW PROFILE TIRES AND WHEELS If your vehicle is equipped with P265 40R22 tires they are low profile tires These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport appearance With low profile tires you may notice an increase in road noise and faster tire wear depending on road conditions and driving styles Due to their design low profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage from potholes rough or unpaved roads car wash rails and curb contact than standard tires and wheels Your vehicle s warranty does not cover these types of damage Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage 2011 Edge edg Owners G
331. or high speed wiping or turning the wiper system off Note The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering a car wash 87 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a guick pressand hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e along press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield This feature can be enabled disabled through the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Windshield wiper rainlamp feature if equipped with autolamp When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position t
332. or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to reach the desired temperature 7 Roy Rear defroster Touch to activate deactivate the rear defroster This button will also activate deactivate the heated mirrors if equipped Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 8 GY Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Touch this button again to return to the previous air flow selection To return to full automatic control touch AUTO 9 Driver temperature control Touch to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle If the passenger temperature controls are not activated dual zone the driver s settings will determine the temperature setting for the entire vehicle cabin 67 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls MyTemp Touch and hold to save the desired temperature for MyTemp To access this setting again simply touch the indicator The MyTemp feature can be used to store and recall a preset driver s temperature This feature is provided so this temperature can be quickly adjusted to a frequently used setting with a single button touch To save a new preset temperature for the active user manually adjust the driv
333. or pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved 95 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Using speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel The following buttons work with speed control SET Press to set a speedor to increase or decrease the set speed A RES Resume Press to resume the set speed CNCL Cancel Press to cancel SET ON the set speed OFF ON OFF Press to turn speed GE control on or off v Setting speed control To set speed control 1 Press ON upward and release 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press SET upward and release 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed control To disengage the speed control press the brake pedal or press and release CNCL Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press and release RES This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed 96
334. or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 219 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Front wheel drive FWD All w
335. ore information on programming replacement IA keys refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section in this chapter Note Your vehicle s TA back up keys were issued with a security tag pul A m Ml 1031X cut information It is recommended that you keep the tag in a safe place for future reference MYKEYTM The MyKey M feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated as a MyKey The key will remain restricted until MyKey is cleared Any remaining keys are referred to as an administrator key or admin key The admin key can be used to create a MyKey M program optional MyKey settings and clear the MyKey 120 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security feature When the MyKey feature is enabled the user can use system check in the message center to see how many MyKeys M and admin keys are programmed to the vehicle and see the total distance the vehicle has been driven with the MyKey M active MyKey M restricted features Standard settings these settings cannot be changed e The audio system will be muted whenever Belt Minder is activated until the safety belts are buckled Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt Minder operation Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a c
336. otsed S B Bewermeterreay 8 Notus 8 JRerseatrea lt lt 37 Right trailer tow TT stop turn lamps relay a Net ese SSS 297 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description 41 Not used Passenger seat 43 ABS valves 4 Rearwasherrelay Rain sensor ot used ot used ot used ot used eated mirror ot used top lamp relay eft TT stop turn lamps relay Wiper relay Left high intensity discharge HID headlamps 5 5 63 64 e sas vw e ea vee 298 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description e e a E P71 A Noted o P72 Noted OOo B i Notused o P74 Netwsed o KC O AC clutchdiode o Notus 7 TT park lamps relay O 8 Netusd 8 Netusd cc 8 Netusd o 8 Netus 86 754 PCM keep alive PCM relay 88 Runstart relay 89 Netus 90 de PCM 94 30A Passenger compartment fuse panel run start a dot used SS Net used SSS 97 Notused SSS A clutch relay 299 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instea
337. ou have activated hill start assist Activating hill start assist 1 Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill Keep the brake pedal pressed 2 If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope hill start assist will be activated automatically 3 When you remove your foot from the brake pedal the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately up to three seconds This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off 4 Drive off in the normal manner The brakes will be released automatically WARNING If the engine is revved excessively or if a malfunction is detected when hill start assist is active hill start assist will be deactivated 264 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts ina steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat It may be beneficial to turn the AdvanceTrac with RSC system off so the wheels are allowed to spin REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The revers
338. ou need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired 300 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Gro
339. ounted stop lamps 10A Keypad illumination Brake shift interlock BSI Passenger compartment fuse panel Start button LED Passive anti theft system PATS Powertrain control module PCM wake up 2nd row power enable m Amplifier subwoofer Sony RR relays vehicles without ME ee access IA Not used spare 15A Steering wheel control IA Headlamp switch 24 On board diagnostics OBDII Liftgate release 26 5A Global positioning system GPS module a a A Ignition switch without IA Key inhibit Oe p p buon star Can TA Radio Multi function display screen enenin panel SYNC modile _ 294 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 32 15A Lock switch backlighting Moon roof Power windows Compass auto dimming rear view mirror 34 10A Reverse sensing system Rearview MN ene a 41 7 5A Occupant classification sensor OCS pT ins emr mende O 48 30A Circuit Power windows moon roof Breaker 9 ae accessory relay Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses 295 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To reduce risk of electrical s
340. ove Activating deactivating collision warning system To turn the warning system and or chime on or off and set the warning sensitivity lt gt refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 273 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note If the system cannot be turned off ina MyKey M eguipped vehicle refer to MyKey M in the Locks and Security chapter for more information Note If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced though the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for instructions on reducing the sensitivity BLIND SPOT MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex spotter mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the outside mirrors They are designed to assist the driver by increasing visibility along the side of the vehicle For more information on your side view mirrors refer to Exterior mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter Driving with blind spot mirrors Before a lane change check the main mirror first then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you are going to change lanes Glan
341. ove the seat all the way back NN 178 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental restraint system work The safety belt pretensioner and airbag SRS are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates pretensioner activation and airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Front airbags are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary
342. overage Up to 5004 Covered Vehicle Componenis There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement
343. ower gear position when ACC is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades i e driving in mountainous areas In these situations additional engine braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating For more information reference Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Note If ACC is applying brakes for an extended period of time an audible alarm will sound and ACC will shut down This is to allow the brakes to cool down When the brakes have cooled down the ACC will again function normally Turning off cruise control Press OFF to turn off the cruise control Note When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Detection issues The radar sensor has a limited field of vision In some situations it may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected Detection issues can occur e When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front 102 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e With vehicles that edge into your lane These vehicles can only be detected once they have moved fully into your lane z eS Gs e There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly The driver should
344. panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient than normal A C mode Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 5 Multifunction control Press repeatedly to toggle through the settings and manually choose one of the following air distribution modes 60 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls e Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents e 2 Distributes air through the demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents 6 G9 Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster This button will also activate deactivate the heated mirrors if equipped Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information T Fan speed adjustment Turn to select the desired fan speed 8 Q Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to redu
345. pass through the blind zone quickly typically less than two seconds the BLIS will not illuminate the alert The BLIS consists of two radar sensors each located rearward of the rear wheels hidden behind the bumper fascia Do not place any type of bumper sticker in this area Note The BLIS typically will not detect parked vehicles humans animals or infrastructure fences guard rails trees etc The BLIS does not function when the transmission is in R Reverse or P Park The BLIS does not provide any additional warning when your turn signal is activated BLIS detection limitations Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zones may not be detected Below is a list of circumstances that may cause non detection e Debris build up on the rear quarter panel fascias e Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone e Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates e Severe weather conditions e When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone 276 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving BLIS False Alerts Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances when the BLIS will alert with no object present in the blind zone This is known as a false alert Some level of false alerts are normal Circumstances that may cause a false alert
346. per the Tire Label Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 ft 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect If you have any concerns or issues contact your authorized dealer 362 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 3 5L V6 Engine 3 7L V6 Engine Air filter element FA 1884 FA 1884 start systems systems Oil filter FL 500 S FL 500 S Spark Plugs SP 520 SP 520 Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 363 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications queoliqn y J20 pue 9BU 100p JOY TON pue syorry dq e60 ASH 9se913 um yyrT yeas soyeJd royLs f g aseely 9SOdMmg UMN sosuly 100p YPI 10 GTX 10 POX pooy Arerixne yoe JueTeamba pooy yotel 100q queotqny Aeidg suog sd11 s1o9yyeom 1001 TV G9D9IN SSM aa Paes i yLIg sp YeA 10JON IIOA19S91 UO YYW x oe SSM amp LOG VueULIOj 19g pue NIN UweeMjoq O T Wd USH eso10 oW UOT VITFIO0ds pIo 29o
347. power steering assist due to a system error service is required CHECK ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS if equipped Displayed when an error is detected in the adaptive headlamps system BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT Displayed when objects are by the passenger seat After the objects are moved away from the seat if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible AWD OFF if equipped Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself This is caused by operating the 42 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re installed or after the system is allowed to cool CHECK AWD Displayed in conjunction with the throttle control transmission AWD we light when the AWD system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible FOR HILL DESCENT REDUCE SPEED 20 MPH OR LESS if equipped Displayed when hill descent speed exceeds 20 MPH FOR HILL DESCENT REDUCE SPEED 32 KM H OR LESS if equipp
348. pport prepares the brake system for rapid braking SS This may be apparent to the driver a However the system will not automatically activate the brakes The vehicle will not stop unless the driver presses the brake pedal If the brake pedal is pressed then braking is implemented with full brake function even if the force on the brake pedal is light The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately 5 mph 8 km h Collision warning system limitations Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles will not provide a collision warning These include e Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph 10 km h Pedestrians or objects in the roadway Oncoming vehicles in the same lane Severe weather conditions see also blocked sensor section Debris build up on the grille near the headlamps see block sensor section e Small distance to vehicle ahead e Steering wheel and pedal movements are large very active driving style e High interior temperatures which may deactivate the illumination or the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces audible warning will alert the driver In addition sun load and sunglasses may reduce the visibility of the warning lamps Therefore it is recommended to keep the audible warning on 272 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING The collision warning system s brake support ca
349. r Prior to the engine stall the vehicle will have 123 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security administrative privileges When you restart the engine the vehicle will identify the user as an admin or MyKey M drive depending on the settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle Note For all vehicles the number of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey M system status menus Will include the non Ford approved remote start system as an additional key in the total count See the Check MyKey system status section Note For all vehicles with a non Ford approved remote start installed it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys in which case you will need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys as admin keys by doing the following 1 Enter the vehicle close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using your non Ford approved remote start fob 3 Follow Steps 1 4 in the Clear MyKey section Troubleshooting Potential Causes Can t create a e Key in the ignition is already a MyKey MyKey e Key in the ignition is the last remaining admin key there always has to be at least one admin key e Intelligent access key if equipped is not in the backup slot for vehicles with push button start e SecuriLock passive anti theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode e Vehicle has been started using a non Ford
350. r air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters 248 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum Use as short an extension cord as possible Do not
351. r button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place _ WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision 170 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Second row comfort guide The second row outboard lap shoulder belt is eguipped with a belt comfort guide This guide is attached to the head restraint and is stored in a pocket in the seatback It is used to adjust the comfort of ae the shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the outboard second row seats To adjust the comfort guide 1 Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide 2 Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is centered on the occupant s shoulder WARNING Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 171 20
352. r pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed e Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above This will increase engine RPM during engine braking e The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated g Grade assist is designed to aid the driver with optimal gear selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas but is not intended for normal operation It is recommended that you return to O D overdrive mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function To return to normal D Drive position with O D press the transmission control switch again e The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated 261 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e The transmission will operate in gears one through six L Low e Provides maximum engine braking e Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle speed allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds Understanding your SelectShift Automatic M Transmission SST This vehicle may be eguipped with a SelectShift Automatic M transmission SST gearshift lever SST is an automatic transmission With the ability for the driver to change gears up or down as desired By moving the gearshift lever from D Drive to M Manual you now have control of selecting the gear you desire using the
353. rammable Ly eff positions The memory seat control is located on the instrument panel e To program position 1 move the driver seat and mirrors to the desired position using the associated controls Press and hold button 1 for at least two seconds A chime will sound confirming that a memory position has been set e To program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using button 2 A memory seat position may be programmed at any time To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter A programmed memory position can be recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on e only in P Park or N Neutral if the ignition is on The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter 2 unlock control if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position The mirrors will move to the programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition if easy entry feature is enabled 155 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Memory profiles The memory feature also coordinates with user created profile settings utilizing the infotainment touchscreen system if eguipped See the Creating a user profile
354. ransmission operation in the Driving chapter Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached anticipate stops and brake gradually Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter Trailer towing tips Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels 241 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow your vehicle for personal travel such as behind a motor home or a truck Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode
355. rbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags 185 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e The same readiness airbag light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Crash sensors mounted in each front door e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats
356. re or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that only cable chains are used with steel wheels of the same size and specifications as chains may chip aluminum wheels Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and cable chains If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Install cable chains only on the front wheels Use only cable chains on 17 inch wheels with P235 65R17 or P245 60R18 tires Do not use tire chains cables or optional traction devices with 20 inch or 22 inch wheels and tires Drive cautiously If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the cable chains If this does not work remove the cable chains to prevent damage to your vehicle Remove the tire cable chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire cable c
357. re returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust release iz button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove os button 4 148 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint 4 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint x Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head
358. re than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 315 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance You are reguired to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seg If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Givil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not reguired by those statutes THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for se
359. restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied 149 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position 4 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and the unlock remove button then pull 4 up on the head restraint To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks r A Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 150 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped WARNING Never adjust the dr
360. ring column once to power open or close the liftgate To power open or close the liftgate with the transmitter Press X9 twice within three seconds to open the liftgate Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter 114 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To power open the liftgate with outside liftgate control button 1 Unlock the liftgate with the transmitter or power door unlock control If the intelligent access transmitter Gf equipped is within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate the liftgate will unlock when you press the liftgate release button 2 To open the liftgate press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Note For the best performance allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation To power close the liftgate with the rear cargo area control button Press and release the control on the left rear quarter panel to close the liftgate Note The rear cargo area control button is disabled when the liftgate is latched fully closed WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch Note The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second press of the instrument panel or the rear cargo area control button
361. rinting USA fus Climate Controls 2 Recirculated air Touch to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except 47 defrost Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential 3 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Touch MAX A C again for normal A C operation 4 A C control Touch to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in MAX A C Q defrost and Y floor defrost 5 Q 48 Power Fan control Touch to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle through the vents Turn to increase or decrease fan speed 6 AUTO Touch to engage full automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow distribution A C on
362. riving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Close windows for high speed driving EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 1 Your vehicle is eguipped with various emission control components anda catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule 353 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can s
363. rning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light as used for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned to the on position e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 187 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety Canopy System 4 objects or mount eguipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event ofa collision WARNING Do not place WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy System its fuses the A B C or D pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy See your authorized dealer WARNING All occ
364. rod 330 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L V6 engine shown 3 7L engine similar Engine coolant reservoir 1 2 Power steering fluid reservoir 3 Brake fluid reservoir 4 Battery 5 6 T 8 9 Power distribution box Air filter assembly Transmission fluid dipstick Engine oil dipstick Engine oil filler cap 10 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 331 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use wa
365. rom OFF Level 1 Level 2 and Level 3 The selected level will appear between the buttons i e Level 1 When activating manual zoom mode the system always starts from OFF When enabled Level 1 Level 2 or Level 3 will only be active while the vehicle is in R Reverse The feature disables outside of R Reverse and must be re enabled the next time the vehicle shifts into R Reverse 268 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus When manual zoom is enabled only the centerline will be shown MA Please check surroundings for safety Rear camera delay After shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image will remain until the vehicle speed reaches five mph 8 km h This will only occur if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any radio button is selected The default setting for the rear camera delay is ON To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is not in R Reverse do the following 1 Select Menu 2 Select Vehicle 3 Select Rear View Camera The rear camera delay options are ON and OFF To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is in R Reverse select Menu The rear camera delay options are ON and OFF Refer to the touchscreen supplement for more information The camera lens for the reverse camera system is located on the liftgate Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth
366. roperly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position 177 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not put anything on or over the airbag module Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint system SRS or its fuses See your authorized dealer WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle Gncluding frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat m
367. rs press the lock area on either door handle black button on chrome handled doors or the small bump on painted door handles Activating intelligent access at the liftgate If your IA key is within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate you can activate your intelligent access system by pressing the exterior liftgate release button hidden under the trim above the license plate The liftgate will release and open Push button start The push button start system allows you to start your vehicle without using a key Refer to Push button start in the Driving chapter 132 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Unlocking the doors two stage unlock 1 Press and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps and parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature this feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned on The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the and controls on the transmitter for four seconds disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The parking lamps will illuminate twice to indicate that two stage unlock was enabled or disabled If equipped with IA key
368. rs stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 283 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Emergency maneuvers e nan unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or
369. rs should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is eee 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel O 2 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground WARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire 304 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Align the slot on top of the jack with the sheet metal flange Zo Ill aS indicated by the jack locator triangle Ke 5 SLO i next to the tire you are changing Turn the jack handle clockwise until A the wheel is completely off the ground 4 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 5 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 6 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise A NN A WY HAN N SY 9 pa CH TP 7 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification
370. rtesy lamp lights when e any door is opened e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off 80 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembiy condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe vi
371. s If operating conditions are normal and you drive your Ford Lincoln or Mercury vehicle under typical everyday conditions and you are using an API performance category oil of SL or later for example SM etc then you can follow the 7 500 mile 12 000 km normal service oil change intervals schedule Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates must follow the oil change interval of 3 000 mile 5 000 km if the owner is using oils defined by the American Petroleum Institute API performance category of API SK or earlier for ex ample SJ efc Engine air filter amp cabin air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter 394 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide COOLANT CHANGE RECORD change coolant whichever comes first 395 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Engine coolant change log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Mi
372. s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 207 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and mainten
373. s traffic reports or business searches your request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information 8 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such eguipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while drivin
374. s a vehicle See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter CHECK FRONT PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the front park aid is disabled and may need service CHECK PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the park aid is disabled CHECK REAR PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the park aid is disabled FRONT PARK AID ON OFF if equipped Displays the front park aid status 46 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster REAR PARK AID ON OFF if equipped Displays the rear park aid status TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the driver s side door In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering the ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and security chapter TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED if equipped Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway For more information refer to the Driving chapter for more information TRANSPORT MODE CONTACT DEALER Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 47 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems MYFORD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED N WARNING Driving whil
375. s the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps MG Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehic
376. s your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon i indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected 354 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon K indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon C indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in i
377. seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating 196 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear se
378. securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse 260 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six The automatic transmission shift strategy has the ability to detect hilly terrain or mountainous areas and will provide a limited amount of grade assist features automatically Refer to D Drive with Grade Assist or SelectShift for more information D Drive with Grade Assist Pressing the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever activates Grade Assist and cancels Overdrive Grade Assist R e Provides additional grade engine braking and extends lower gear operation on uphill climbs for hilly terrain or mountainous areas a e Provides additional engine re braking through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acceleration accelerato
379. self correct CTA and reverse sensing system RSS interaction CTA works along with the reverse sensing system RSS if equipped Become familiar with the warning tones of both systems BLIS and or CTA on off and disable operation The BLIS and or the CTA can be turned off via the message center If either the BLIS and or the CTA is turned off the systems will automatically turn back on at the next ignition key cycle When either the BLIS and or the CTA is turned off the message center displays BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and or CTA SYSTEM OFF When the BLIS and or the CTA system is off the driver will not receive alerts Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information The BLIS and or the CTA can be disabled permanently even after an ignition key cycle This must be done by your authorized dealer Note Once either of the systems are disabled enabling must also be performed at the dealership When disabled the message center will display BLIND SPOT DISABLED and or CTA DISABLED 279 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving BLIS and or CTA fault operation If the BLIS and or CTA senses a fault on either the left or right sensor the BLIS alert indicator will go on and remain on and the message center will display BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT For
380. sets the gap to the last selected setting Once activated the driver can deactivate the system at any time by pressing the brake pedal pressing the steering wheel ON OFF control or pressing the RES CNCL control In addition the driver can temporarily increase the vehicle speed above the current speed by manually pressing on the accelerator pedal 97 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Always pay close attention to changing road conditions especially when using adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control cannot replace attentive driving Failing to follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road may result in a collision serious injury or death WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or avoidance system Additionally adaptive cruise control will not detect e Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph 10 km h e Pedestrians or objects in the roadway e Oncoming vehicles in the same lane WARNING Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved WARNING Do not use in poor visibility specifically fog rain spray or snow Using adaptive cruise control Note It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times The controls for using your cruise control are locate
381. sher fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle 4 from the wiper arm Press the lock 5 tab to release the blade and pull the 2 lt wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter 332 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element Changing rear window wiper blade The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position This reduces the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash To replace the wiper blade 1 Grab the wiper arm with one hand close to the arm blade joint a and pull it as far away from the a glass as possible Do not use me excessive force because it can break
382. sibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time 81 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Pareto Number of Trade by bulbs number Headlamp high low beam halogen HIR2 HID high intensity discharge headlamp Front sidemarker lamp ed 2 EE A gt ai haram a a amber NN ea Backup lamp o a S a License plate lamp 2 168 High mount brake lamp Maplamp S a2 O wO O Second row dome reading lamp 3 58 Rear courtesy lamp o 1 58 Visor vanity lamp 8 Replacing interior bulbs 2 2 A 2 2 4 2 2 A 2 3 1 2 Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Open the hood 82 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 3 Remove the bulb cover 8 o 4 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it 5 Disconnect the electrical connector WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated 6 Reverse the procedure
383. side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion 93 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if eguipped The interior rear view mirror has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Note A rear center passenger and or raised rear center headrest Cif equipped may also block the light from reaching the sensor Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center posit
384. simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy e You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting b
385. sion may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 291 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Kn Fuse link rating fuses fuses fuses an cartridge a Gey Grey SA Violet Violet gt Ca Pink Pink __ a Tan Tan SA Brown Brown ioa ra Rea ia Blue Blue _ EBA Natural_ Natural 40A G Orange Green Green A Red Red Red soa Blue Yellow Yellow a ton Brown Peon E Natural Black Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the driver s footwell near the parking brake To remove the trim panel slide th
386. sit Check and top up fluid levels brake coolant recovery reservoir manual and automatic transmission if equipped with an underhood dipstick power steering if equipped and window washer Inspect tires for wear and check air pressure including spare Check exhaust system for leaks damage loose parts and foreign material Check battery performance Check operation of horn exterior lamps turn signals and hazard warning lights Check radiator coolers heater and air conditioning hoses Inspect windshield washer spray and wiper operation Check windshield for cracks chips and pitting Inspect for oil and fluid leaks Inspect engine air filter Inspect half shaft dust boots if equipped Check shocks and struts and other suspension components for leaks and damage Inspect steering and linkage Inspect accessory drive belt s Inspect clutch operation if equipped Be sure to ask your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It s a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It s your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You ll know what s been checked what s okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great 381 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
387. speed 4 Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank When the ignition is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Optional cluster shown in standard measure metric similar N 1 Multifunction display This displays the fuel gauge tachometer engine coolant temperature odometer trip meter and other vehicle features This is also used to configure different vehicle personalization options and display the status of various vehicle functions See Optional message center in this chapter for more information 2 Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed 3 Infotainment display This display is used for the entertainment phone navigation and climate systems See the MyFord Touch supplement for more information BASE MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 19 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Your vehicle
388. st appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts Parts other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability It is the owner s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information Non Ford approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance In fact Ford Motor Company recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Ford for a particular application Oil fluids and flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjuncti
389. stability control off light will illuminate steadily Selecting traction control OFF on will turn off the stability control light In R Reverse ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction control features will continue to function However ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac Features Message center rece TCS a display System N Default at initializa Nothing dis En Enabled start up tion played abled Control switch Traction TRACTION En Dis pressed once control On CONTROL abled abled momentarily OFF OFF Control switch A Advance pressed again ADVANCE En after deactiva Tac fully OT TRACON ablea Enabled tm enable 256 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving TRAILER SWAY CONTROL When properly equipped trailer sway control will use the vehicle s AdvanceTrac with RSC system to detect and help reduce trailer sway by applying brake force at individual wheels and if necessary by reducing engine power Trailer sway control is only enabled above 40 mph 64 km h WARNING Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from swaying It mitigates the sway from increasing once it has occurred If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the vehicle and trailer is too high Pull the vehicle trailer over to a safe location to check the trailer weight distribution a
390. stay alert and intervene when necessary ACC Not Available Several conditions exist which can cause ACC to deactivate or prevent ACC from activating when requested These conditions include e The sensor is blocked refer to Blocked sensor in this section e Brake temperature is high refer to Hilly condition usage in this section e A failure has occurred in the ACC system or related system 103 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Blocked sensor If a message regarding a blocked sensor is displayed the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille When the radar signals are obstructed a vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the ACC will not function The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed Action The surface of the radar in the Clean the grille surface in front of grille is dirty or obstructed in the radar or remove the object some way causing the obstruction The surface of the radar in the Wait a short time It may take grille is clean but the message several minutes for the radar to remains in the display detect that it is no longer obstructed Heavy rain or snow is interfering Do not use ACC in these condition with the radar signals because it may not detect warn or respond to potential collisions Swirling water or sno
391. strument Cluster REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT Displayed when objects are by the passenger seat After the objects are moved away from the seat if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TRACTION CONTROL OFF Displayed when the traction control has been disabled by the driver Refer to the Driving chapter for more information AWD OFF if equipped Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re installed or after the system is allowed to cool CHECK AWD Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control Transmission AWD aa light when the AWD system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE if equipped Displayed when the vehicle is in the accessory ignition state COULD NOT PROGRAM INTEGRATED KEY Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information KEY PROGRAMMED 3 KEYS TOTAL Displayed during spare key programming when a third Intelligent Access Key is programmed to the system KEY PROG
392. submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 288 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln e
393. t display 30 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Press the up down arrow buttons to move up down through the message center choices Press the left right arrow buttons to move left right through the message center choices Press the OK button to select highlighted options and confirm choices messages Main menu From the main menu screen you can choose the following e Display Mode e Trip 1 amp 2 e Fuel Economy e Settings e Information Scroll up down to highlight one of the options then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that menu option 31 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Display mode Press the right arrow on the left steering wheel mounted button when Display mode is selected The boxes in the upper right corner of the screen indicate that there are multiple screens that you can navigate through Each press of the right arrow will navigate to the next screen until the last screen is reached The white highlighted box indicates which of the screens you are currently viewing Distance to empty DTE Fuel gauge Bar tachometer N XXX mi HZ to Empty 01234 5mi g m i e Distance to empty DTE Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel tank reaches empty The value is dynamic and can change raise or lower depending on driving style e Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is l
394. t may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 229 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any ti
395. t tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 236 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your
396. t up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Low fuel RTT Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at Low tire pressure warning Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at re or near empty Refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter 15 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Speed control RTT The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system is in e On gray light Illuminates when the speed control system is turned on Turns off when the speed control system is turned off Engaged green light Illuminates when the speed control system is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged Adaptive cruise control RTT if equipped The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system is in e On gray light Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on Turns off when the speed control system is turned off
397. tart a fire Illumination of the service engine soon C indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assist
398. tem malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled 45 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster BLINDSPOT NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL Cif equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind S pot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault with the blind spot information system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault with the cross traffic alert system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CROSS TRAFFIC VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter CROSS TRAFFIC VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and sense
399. ter the ignition has been turned off e If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors or the trunk was opened the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off e The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off Accessory mode battery saver for intelligent access keys with push button start if equipped The battery saver will shut off the ignition approximately 45 minutes after the vehicle is left in accessory mode in order to preserve the vehicle s battery Remote start if equipped The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle If your transmitter has a icon you have remote start The 137 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security remote start feature has an extended operating range which allows you to remote start your vehicle from a farther distance from your vehicle All the buttons have this increased range performance capability when equipped with remote start Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is started Refer to Remote start climate options in the Climate Controls chapter for more information and also refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter to learn how to enable different climate options A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when the vehicl
400. ter the prompt Say a command you may say any of the following commands e Climate On e Climate Off eClimate Automatic eClimate My Temperature eClimate Temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt eClimate Temperature lt 60 85 gt degrees degrees 71 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls There are additional climate control commands but in order to access them you have to say Climate first then when the system is ready to listen you may say any of the following commands e Automatic e Off e A C Off e Max A C On e Defrost On eRear Defrost On e Recirc On e Panel On e Floor On e Temperature High e Fan Increase e Temperature e Temperature Decrease e Temperature lt 60 85 gt degrees e Help e Dual Off eOn e A C On e Max A C Off e Defrost Off e Rear Defrost Off e Recirc Off e Panel Floor On e Windshield Floor On e Temperature Low e Fan Decrease e Temperature Increase e Temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees e My Temp Note If you have said Temperature you can then say any of the following commands e High e lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees e Low e lt 60 85 gt degrees For more information on your touchscreen system refer to the MyFord Touch MyLincoln Touch supplement REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice The engine must be ru
401. th soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 345 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel e Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling It can ignite fuel vapors Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container w
402. than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability 212 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 48 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carryin
403. the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your
404. the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the ve hicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light will turn off Spare Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair tire in the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it use on the vehicle to restore system functional ity For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 228 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low tire Possible Customer action reguired pressure cause warning light Flashing Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair warning light the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system func tions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warn ing light still flashes contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires I
405. the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 368 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production seguence number TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO win DATE GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The following table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAMR XXHXLE which transmission each code XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH represents XXX A eg RNs AT XXX KPa XX PS COL AT XXX KPaXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR TIPPS TR TAXLE SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XMM XXXX XXXXXXX XX 6 speed automatic transmission 6F50 369 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories FORD CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
406. the sun sensor ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time all wheel drive AWD system The AWD system is an active system meaning it not only responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels before slip occurs The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator 281 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no maintenance Note When an AWD system fault is present the warning CHECK AWD will display in the message center The AWD system is not functioning correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive When this warning is displayed have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer If your vehicle is equipped with AWD a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used If the spare tire is installed the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components This condition may be indicated by an AWD OFF message in the message center see Message center section in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information If there is an AWD OFF message in the message center from using the spare tire this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and driving a
407. tion system cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault with the blind spot information system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault with the cross traffic alert system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 29 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT if equipped Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle See Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter ACTIVE PARK FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault has occurred with the active park assist system Refer to Activ
408. to install the new bulb 83 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing HID headlamp bulbs if eguipped The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage When the bulb is burned out the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Open the hood 3 Reach over the front bolster 4 Rotate the bulb socket EX aN counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly 2 5 Carefully pull the bulb out of the socket and push in the new bulb 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 84 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing tail stop turn sidemarker backup lamp bulbs The tail stop turn sidemarker backup lamp bulbs are located in the same area of the tail lamp assembly one below the other Follow the same steps to replace these bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the liftgate to expose the lamp assembly bolts 2 Remove the two bolts from the lamp assembly 3 Carefully remove the lamp assembly away from the vehicle by pulling the assembly straight out to expose the bulb socket 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise an
409. to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 313 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of
410. tomatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy management feature front outboard e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user s chest WARNING Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with s
411. tput These are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible Dont set the volume on your portable music player higher than necessary as this may cause distortion and reduce sound guality e If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the volume on the portable music player down and check to see if you need to replace or recharge the batteries e The AlJ doesn t provide control over your portable music player You still need to use the controls on the player for functions such as play pause etc For safety reasons you should not connect or adjust your portable music player while the vehicle is moving The portable music player should have a long enough extension cable to allow it to be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion Phone PHONE Press to mute the playing media Press again to return to the playing media MYFORD TOUCH IF EQUIPPED WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 58 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Q
412. trians or cyclists WARNING To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist The BLIS and CTA has a yellow indicator also referred to as the alert located in the left and right exterior mirrors When the vehicle is started the BLIS automatically illuminates both indicators for several seconds indicating the system is operating The first time you place the transmission in D Drive after starting the engine and drive forward at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h the BLIS system becomes active Afterwards the BLIS remains active for all speeds 275 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving including zero mph BLIS is also active if the transmission is placed in N Neutral If the transmission is shifted out of D Drive or N Neutral the system will enter the CTA mode see CTA operation below Once shifted back in to D Drive the BLIS mode will activate once driven above 3 mph 5 km h The BLIS will trigger the alert for vehicles that enter your blind zone from the rear or merge in to the blind zone from the side Vehicles that you pass or a vehicle that enters the blind zone from the front will trigger the alert only after the vehicle is present in the blind zone for three seconds Note For vehicles that
413. trol to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS Dual Automatic Temperature Control DATC system with and without heated seats if equipped Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius Press MENU gt Display Settings gt Temp Setting or refer to Settings in the Message Center section of the Instrument Cluster chapter 1 A C control Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO W defrost and wd floor defrost 62 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 2 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except 47 defrost Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential 3 PASS TEMP Press to activate dual zone separate passenger temperature control
414. ts et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou COLD TIRE PRESSURE THE PRESSION DES SEE OWNER S PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR o a ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 psi VORLEMANUEL SPARE POUR PLUS DE secourns 1145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS FE 7 x lt 5 gt zs x gt kd x S R bei gt X000000000000000X CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional eguipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 233 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer ia GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weig
415. tters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If
416. tting the pause time between wiping will automatically adjust with the vehicle speed The faster your vehicle is travelling the shorter the pause time between wipes will become Rain sensing wipers if equipped The rain sensing wipers designated with AUTO on the control will automatically activate when moisture is present on the windshield and the control is set to one of five auto interval moisture sensitivity settings Rotate the end of the control toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity The speed of the rain sensing wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and the auto interval setting There are no interval intermittent wipe settings on vehicles with rain sensing wipers The wipers will continue to wipe as long as the presence of moisture is detected on the windshield More or less wiping may occur depending on humidity mist or light rain or road spray This feature can be enabled disabled through the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Keep the outside of the windshield clean especially the area around the rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance may be affected Note During winter driving conditions with ice snow or a salty road mist inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur In these conditions you can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of smearing or override the feature by selecting low
417. ttlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines 316 2011 Edge edg Own
418. tton and observe the indicator light 109 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Gate Operator amp Canadian Pr
419. ty with a vehicle equipped with intelligent access Failure to do so may result in interference with the medical device which could result in serious injury Your intelligent access system uses a radio frequency RF signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when commanded either by touching the inside of the driver or front passenger exterior door handle the power liftgate button or a button on the transmitter itself If excessive RF interference is present in the area or if your vehicle battery is low it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door The mechanical key blade in your TA key can be used to open the driver s door in this situation refer to Intelligent access key in this chapter for more information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade Your vehicle will allow you to unlock and enter your vehicle without actively using a key or transmitter You can use the intelligent access feature at the front doors or at the liftgate You can activate the intelligent access feature as long as you have one of your IA keys within range of the front doors or the liftgate Activating intelligent access at the front doors If your TA key is within 3 feet 1 meter of the front doors you can activate your intelligent access system by touching the inside of the driver or front passenger exterior door handle The door s will automatically unlock and the door can be opened To lock the doo
420. u will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 225 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPM
421. uick Dial V7 Phonebook lt 7 Auto 0 E Your vehicle may be eguipped with an infotainment system which utilizes a four corner strategy and dynamic menu listings to provide guick access to vehicle features and settings For complete information on this system please refer to your MyFord Touch MyLincoln Touch Supplement 59 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls SINGLE ZONE MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius Press MENU gt Display Settings gt Temp Setting 1 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C 47 defrost and amp floor defrost 2 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except QQ defrost Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential 3 Temperature control Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 4 MAX A C if equipped Distributes recirculated air through the instrument
422. uide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle
423. ulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket if eguipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if eguipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press the front or rear portion to tilt the seat MA v lt Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down 153 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Power recline if equipped Move the switch to recline the SA seatback forward or rearward Using the power lumbar support The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat Press one side of the control to adjust firmness Press the other side of the control to adjust softness Heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because o
424. uminated or ABS Airbag readiness If this light fails e to illuminate when the ignition is turned on continues to flash or IN remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder A chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restrainis chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature 14 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Charging system RTT Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Engine oil pressure RTT Illuminates when the oil pressure IO falls below the normal range refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter AdvanceTrac Displays when the AdvanceTrac Traction control is active If the light remains on have co the system serviced immediately refer to the Driving chapter for more information AdvanceTrac off light Illuminates when AdvanceTrac Traction control has been disabled by the driver Refer to OFF the Driving chapter for more information star
425. und clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel 301 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability Gif applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake 2 Place the gearshift lever in P Park and turn the engine off 302 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
426. upants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy System is provided WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy 188 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the Safety Canopy System work The design and development of the Safety Canopy System included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of gt injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy System consists of the following e An inflatable curtain with a gas generator concealed behind the headliner and above the doors one on each side of vehicle e A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow safety canopy deployment e The same readiness airbag light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Crash sensors mounted in each front door e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle e Rollover sensor in the restraints control module RCM The Safety Canopy System in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of
427. ure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns 213 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely a
428. urned off The delay time is set to 20 seconds at the factory but the delay time may be changed by following the steps below Steps 1 through 6 must be done within 10 seconds 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Rotate the headlamp control to the autolamp position 75 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 3 Rotate the headlamp control to the off position 4 Turn the vehicle on 5 Turn the vehicle off 6 Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position the headlights should turn on 7 Turn the headlamp control to the off position when the desired delay time up to three minutes has been reached High beams Pull the lever fully to second detent to activate Pull the lever again to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on at reduced intensity output To activate e the ignition must be in the on position and e the headlamp control must be in the off autolamps or parking lamps position WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision 76 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights P
429. ursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the direction
430. use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dr
431. usly checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type 356 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is warmed up approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off until normal operati
432. vated The turn signal control activation and cancellation is electronic e To operate the left turn signal push the lever down until it stops and release e To operate the right turn signal push the lever up until it stops and release e To manually cancel turn signal operation push the lever again in either direction Lane change To indicate a left or right lane change e Push the lever up down to the first stop position and release The turn signals will flash three times and stop e Push the lever up down to the first stop position and hold The turn signals will flash if the lever is held in this position 79 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights INTERIOR LAMPS Front row map lamps if equipped To turn on the map lamps press the outer edge of the clear lens The front row map lamp lights when e any door is opened e the dome lamp button on the instrument panel is activated e the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off Map dome lamp if equipped The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened e the dome lamp button on the instrument panel is activated e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of the lens Rear courtesy lamp Located in the rear cargo area the cou
433. ve screen has been provided in its place and must remain installed at all times For replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter see the scheduled maintenance information For more information regarding your filter see your authorized dealer 74 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off E Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the headlamps on wav 3002 ZD C 0 Autolamp control if eguipped The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control e To turn autolamps on rotate the control to W e To turn autolamps off rotate the control from the autolamp position The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off You can change the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming procedure that follows Note If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the headlamps on with windshield wipers feature If the windshield wipers are turned on the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp control in the autolamp position Autolamp delay system if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with autolamps you can set the delay time to keep the headlights on for up to three minutes after the key is t
434. veace 396 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace A Accessory delay 93 Adaptive Cruise Control 97 AdvanceTrac 252 Air cleaner filter 359 363 Air conditioning 60 62 64 66 manual heating and air conditioning system 60 Airbag supplemental restraint SYSTEMI sise 176 177 185 188 and child safety seats 178 description 177 185 188 disposal se ime la 191 driver airbag 179 185 189 indicator light 184 187 190 operation 179 185 189 passenger airbag 179 185 189 sideairbag 185 All Wheel Drive AWD driving Off road 281 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 338 Anti lock brake system seeBrakes 250 Anti theft system 141 145 arming the system 142 145 disarming a triggered SYS isem yalan 145 Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVETOMIVE 5255 69 ee Ne gaera 260 HUI adding sel ae 357 fluid CHECKING sim 35
435. ver the back of the seat For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint If the top of the safety seat hits the adjustable head restraint raise the head restraint to let the child seat fit further rearward 203 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Locate the correct anchor behind C the gap cover for the selected A Al seating position j i GE G5 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown WARNING If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions WARNING If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner
436. verage This information is subject to change 376 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why maintain your vehicle This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your vehicle Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering specifications Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in this guide Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer has factory trained technicians who can perform the required maintenance using genuine Ford parts They are committed to meeting your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction Protecting your investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To ensure the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals
437. w 3 or red zones 2 Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle Visual park aid alert if equipped Visual park aid alert allows the driver to see the area that is causing the reverse sensing system to beep The visual alerts are red yellow or green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing system The visual alert will highlight the closest object detected by the reverse sensing system The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled highlighted areas will still be displayed To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is not in R Reverse do the following on the touchscreen 1 Select Menu 2 Select Vehicle 3 Select Rear View Camera The visual park aid alert options are ON and OFF To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is in R Reverse select Menu The visual park aid alert options are ON and OFF Note The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects Manual zoom The manual zoom feature assists drivers with connecting their vehicle to a trailer for the purpose of towing It allows the driver to manually zoom closer to an object behind the vehicle The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference Press or V to manually adjust the zoom levels You can choose f
438. w or ice on Do not use ACC in these condition the surface of the road may because it may not detect warn interfere with the radar signals or respond to potential collisions WARNING Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake controls Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury 104 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Do not use tires sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of ACC Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury Switching to normal cruise control You can manually change from adaptive cruise control ACC to normal cruise control through the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter If normal cruise control is selected the ACC indicator light will be replaced with a cruise control indicator light The gap setting will not be displayed the system will not automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking will not be activated The system will default to ACC when the engine is started WARNING Normal cruise control will not brake due to slower vehicles Always be aware of which mode is selected and apply the brakes when necessary STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
439. y not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event SOS Post Crash Alert System The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags 191 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in a
440. y prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater will use 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use Your 249 2011 Edge edg Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an anti lock braking system ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor an

Ford 2010 Fusion Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents